Home

Wave Window

Contents

1. ccc eee eee eens 29 Table 1 2 Graphic Elements of Toolbar in Find Mode 0 0 0 0 eee eee 27 Table 1 3 Graphic Elements of Toolbar in Filter Mode 0000 28 Table 1 4 Information Displayed in Status Bar 2 0 0 0 eee 36 Table 1 5 Design Object Icons 42 cece eeu er eceres eect ess cetuees secede es a cedus 37 Table 1 6 Icon Shapes and Design Object Types 0 0 0 ccc cee eee 37 Table 2 1 File Menu Item Description 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 42 Table 2 2 Edit Menu Item Description 0 0 0 0c cc eee eens 44 Table 2 3 View Menu Item Description 0 0 00 cee eens 44 Table 2 4 Compile Menu Item Description 0 0 cece eee 45 Table 2 5 Simulate Menu Item Description 0 00 00 45 Table 2 6 Add Menu Item Description 0 0 0 0 cc ee eee 47 Table 2 7 Tools Menu Item Description 0 0 00 eee eee 47 Table 2 8 Layout Menu Item Description 0 cece eens 49 Table 2 9 Bookmarks Menu Item Description 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee eee 49 Table 2 10 Window Menu Item Description 0 0 cc eee eee 49 Table 2 11 Help Menu Item Description 0 ccc eee eee 5I Table 3 1 ATV Toolbar Buttons 0 0 eee eens 53 Table 3 2 Analysis Toolbar Buttons 0 0 ce eens 54 Table 3 3 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 0 ccc c
2. Save the coverage metrics to a UCDB file Coverage Report Save the coverage metrics to report file Coverage Configuration Access menus for configuring coverage related items such as goal weight and colorization Refer to the secton Viewing Test Data in the GUI for more information Profile Access tasks for the memory and performance profilers Refer to the chapter Profiling Performance and Memory Use for more information Perform signal trace actions Dataset Snapshot Enable periodic saving of simulation data to a wif file ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 47 Menus Tools Menu Table 2 7 Tools Menu Item Description cont C Debug Access tasks for the C Debug interface Refer to the chapter C Debug for more information JobSpy Access tasks for the JobSpy utility Refer to the chapter Monitoring Simulations with JobSpy for more information TA Execute or debug a Tcl macro Wildcard Filter Refer to the section Using the WildcardFilter Preference Variable for more information Edit Preferences Set GUI preference variables Refer to the section Simulator GUI Preferences for more information 48 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Menus Layout Menu Layout Menu Table 2 8 Layout Menu Item Description Reset the GUI to the default appearance for the selected layout Save Layout As Save your reorganized view to a custom layout Refer to the section
3. out test strb Dragging and Dropping Objects into the Wave and List Windows ModelSim allows you to drag and drop objects from the Source window to the Wave and List windows Double click an object to highlight it then drag the object to the Wave or List window To place a group of objects into the Wave and List windows drag and drop any section of highlighted code When an object is dragged and dropped into the Wave window the add wave command will be reflected in the Transcript window Setting your Context by Navigating Source Files When debugging your design from within the GUI you can change your context while analyzing your source files Figure 4 67 shows the pop up menu the tool displays after you select then right click an instance name in a source file ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 217 Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 67 Setting Context from Source Files El C examples tutorials verilog datafow proc v top p Default 39 task read 36A input addr size 1 0 a 37 output word size 1 0 a 38 begin Open Instance 33 if verbose display Asc nd Env p 404 addr r as Back b 41 Structure sim top p2 BUF 24 Forward 42 and2 v 24 43 sim top p i2 BUF 24 44 sim top p data Cut 45 sim top p a Copy Col4 c emi sim top p write a Paste Ctrl y 47 endtasE Find Cil4F ae eee x Find HB addr a H ETC aa Ci 0 i ats z and2 v gt Show Drivers T i ar
4. D aa D fa M oi Biers EE Using the Filter Mode By entering a string in the Contains text entry box you can filter the view of the selected window down to the specific information you are looking for Table 1 3 Graphic Elements of Toolbar in Filter Mode Filter Regular Expression A drop down menu that allows you to set the wildcard mode A text entry box for your filter string 28 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General GUI Tasks Table 1 3 Graphic Elements of Toolbar in Filter Mode cont Clear Filter None Clears the text entry box and og removes the filter from the active window Wildcard Usage There are three wildcard modes e glob style Allows you to use the following special wildcard characters matches any sequence of characters in the string matches any single character in the string lt chars gt matches any character in the set lt chars gt lt x gt matches the single character lt x gt which allows you to match on any special characters and Refer to Finding Items in the Structure Window and the Tcl documentation for more information Help gt Tcl Man Pages Tcl Commands gt string gt string match e regular expression Source window only allows you to use wildcard characters based on Tcl regular expressions For more information refer to the Tcl documentation Help gt Tcl Man Pages Tcl Commands gt re_synt
5. In addition you can use the write format restart command to create a single do file that will recreate all debug windows and breakpoints see Saving and Restoring Breakpoints when invoked with the do command in subsequent simulation runs The syntax 1s write format restart lt filename gt If the ShutdownFile modelsim ini variable is set to this do filename it will call the write format restart command upon exit Combining Signals into Buses You can combine signals in the List window into buses A bus is a collection of signals concatenated in a specific order to create a new virtual signal with a specific value A virtual compare signal the result of a comparison simulation is not supported for combination with any other signal To combine signals into a bus use one of the following methods e Select two or more signals in the Wave or List window and then choose List gt Combine Signals from the menu bar A virtual signal that is the result of a comparison simulation is not supported for combining with any other signal e Use the virtual signal command at the Main window command prompt Configuring New Line Triggering New line triggering refers to what events cause a new line of data to be added to the List window By default ModelSim adds a new line for any signal change including deltas within a single unit of time resolution You can set new line triggering on a signal by signal basis or for the whole simulation To s
6. Step Over Command step over Step the simulation over the Current current current instance process or thread Step Out Command step out Step the simulation out of the Current current current instance process or thread Wave Toolbar The Wave toolbar allows you to perform specific actions in the Wave window Figure 3 24 Wave Toolbar Se PE ade Search BA oe Table 3 22 Wave Toolbar Buttons Show Drivers Display driver s of the selected signal net or register in the Schematic and Source windows Display drivers only in the Show Drivers Source window source only The source window 1s not shown 1f there are no drivers 14 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Wave Toolbar Table 3 22 Wave Toolbar Buttons cont Show Readers Display reader s of the selected signal net or register in the Dataflow window Show Readers Display drivers only in the source only Source window The source window is not shown 1f there are no readers Add Menu Add gt To Wave Creates a group labeled Contributing gt Contributing Signals Contributors lt name gt Signals where lt name gt is the name of the currently selected signal This group contains the inputs to the process driving lt name gt Wave Search Click on the box when in Text entry box for the search Box transition mode Falling string Dropdown button Edge Rising Edge or displays previous search
7. m mampi Hoei a gdan EITI iD AAWAYAN hopit Pr iste cP Reading foo eddeets drD Read hit to get J jf Read Write test done i preoc 94 Tame 2820 me ltecetion Instante ftopsp BE pPooc y dine 34 SM I gt Tab Group You can group any number of windows into a single space called a tab group allowing you to show and hide windows by selecting their tabs Figure 1 17 shows a tab group of the Library Files Capacity and Structure windows with the Structure sim window visible 34 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General Visual Elements Figure 1 17 GUI Tab Group diin H A x instance Design unit Design unit type visibility Total coverage HE top topifast Module aCC Fp procifast Module acc c cachefFast Module acc ri menmorytFast Module acc G Tab g FASSIGN 29 memoryifast Process ae g FASSIGN 3O memoryifast Process OD FALWaAyYS 35 memoryifast Process g INITIOL 25 bopt Fast Process D FAlwaysateg bopt Fast Process sim_ capacity Foreign 4Cc i Library g sim E Capacity Pane Some windows contain panes which are separate areas of a window display containing distinct information within that window One way to tell if a window has panes is whether you receive different popup menus right click menu in different areas Windows that have panes include the Wave Source and List window
8. Class Type lists the parameterized class type name of the corresponding classes in the window Comment displays comments that appear with the instance of a covergroup or a coverpoint or cross of the covergroup instance Coverage weighted average of the coverage of the constituent coverpoints and crosses Covered Bins lists the of covered bins hits for covergroup coverpoint cross and covergroup instance objects Cover Testname In post processing mode Coverage View it displays the name of the test which covered the bin During live simulation the lt current_test gt is displayed displays the time when the bin was covered Cross_num_print_missing the number of missing not covered cross product bins that must be saved to the coverage database and printed in the coverage report Detect_overlap shows when a warning has been issued for an overlap between the range list or transition list of two bins of a coverpoint Get_inst_coverage the value of the get_inst_coverage covergroup option When true it enables the tracking of per instance coverage with the get_inst_coverage built in method e When false the value returned by get_inst_coverage shall equal the value returned by get_coverage the desired coverage total as an integer percent Hit the percentage of the total covergroup bins which have been hit Total Hits divided by Covered Bins Included indicates whether the Covergroup is included i
9. You must have executed the vsim command before this window will contain any information about your simulation environment Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Files e Command view files Figure 4 17 Files Window Ea Files Haiz ee C fQueskaTestca f l v_and whd endai C OuestaTestca fl util hd util hd CfQueskaTestca top vhd top vhd CfQueskaTestca timing _p 2000 vhd Cilqueskasim main winse Cifqueskasim rai timing b 2000 vhd Cilqueskasim main winse Ci fqueskasim mai textio vhid Cilqueskasim main winse Ciiqueskasim rai stdlogic vhd Ciiqueskasim main winse Ci fqueskasim mai std logic _bextio vhd Cilqueskasim main winse Ci fiqueskasim mai standard vhd Cilqueskasim main winse Cifqueskasim rai fal set set vhd C lGuestaTestca proc vhd C fQueskaTestca b Cilqueskasim main winse Cilqueskasim rai mti_numeric_std hd Ciiqueskasim main winse Ci fqueskasim mai memory vhd memory vhd CfQuesktaTestca gates vhd gates vhd C fQueskaTestca cache vhd cache vhd C fQueskaTestca GUI Elements of the Files Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 129 Window Reference Files Window Column Descriptions Table 4 20 Files Window Columns Specified Path The location of the file as specified in the design file
10. hui Wand Module H Floatfixlib Library C iguestasim_6 6l examplesitutorials Ciquestasim 6 6 examples tutorials Ciyquestasim 6 6 examplesitutorials Ci questasim 6 6 examples tutorials Ciquestasim 6 6 examplesitubtorials Ciquestasim 6 6 examples tutorials Ciyquestasim 6 6 examplesitutorials Ci questasim 6 6 examples tutorials Ciquestasim 6 6 examples tutorials MODEL_TECH Floatfixlib GUI Elements of the Library Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Column Descriptions Table 4 31 Library Window Columns Name of the library or design unit Full pathname to the file ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 148 Window Reference Library Window Popup Menu Right click anywhere in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 32 Library Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem Simulate Loads a simulation of the selected design unit implicitly calling vopt with full visibility voptargs acc Simulate without Optimization Loads a simulation of the selected design unit where it does not use optimization novopt Simulate with full Optimization Loads a simulation of the selected design unit implicitly calling vopt with no visibility Simulate with Coverage Loads a simulation of the selected design unity enabling coverage coverage Opens the selected file in your editor window Reloads the c
11. 2 Last Used If there is no layout related to your current working directory the GUI attempts to load your last manipulations for that layout mode regardless of your directory 3 Default If you have never manipulated a layout mode or have deleted the modelsim file or the registry the GUI will load the default appearance of the layout mode Configure Window Layouts Dialog Box The Configure Window Layouts dialog box allows you to alter the default behavior of the GUI layouts You can display this dialog box by selecting the Layout gt Configure menu item The elements of this dialog box include Specify a Layout to Use This pane allows you to map which layout is used for the four actions Refer to the section Changing Layout Mode Behavior for additional information e Save window layout automatically This option on by default instructs the GUI to save any manipulations to the layout mode upon exit or changing the layout mode e Save Window Layout by Current Directory This option on by default instructs the tool to save the final state of the GUI layout on a directory by directory basis This means that the next time you open the GUI from a given directory the tool will load your previous GUI settings e Window Restore Properties Button Opens the Window Restore Properties Dialog Box Refer to Configuring Default Windows for Restored Layouts for more information Creating a Custom Layout Mode To creat
12. 331000 0 OOLOOO00000 Wl BLES 351000 0 OOOOOO00001 IDLE 44 lines al Using radix define to Specify Radix Color The following example illustrates how to use the radix define command to specify the radix color Example 6 2 Using radix define to Specify Color radix define States 11 b 00000000001 IDLE color yellow 11 b 00000000010 CTRL color ffee00 11 00000000100 WT_WD_1 color orange 11 00000001000 WT_WD_2 color orange 11 b 00000010000 WT_BLK_1 11 b 00000100000 WT_BLK_2 11 b 00001000000 WT_BLK 3 11 b 00010000000 WE BLK 4 11 bO00100000000 WT_BLK_5 11 bO1000000000 RD WD_1 color green 11 b1l0000000000 RD WD_2 color green default hex defaultcolor white If a pattern label pair does not specify a color the normal wave window colors will be used If the value of the waveform does not match any pattern then default lt radix_type gt and defaultcolor will be used To specify a range of values wildcards may be specified for bits or characters of the value The wildcard character is similar to the iteration character in a Verilog UDP for example radix define 6 b01 00 Write color orange 6 b10 00 Read color green In this example the first pattern will match 010000 010100 011000 and 011100 In case of overlaps the first matching pattern is used going from top to bottom ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 301 GUI Customization
13. Home move cursor to the beginning of the text Ctrl End move cursor to the end of the text Backspace delete character to the left Ctrl h UNIX only Delete delete character to the right Ctrl d UNIX only Ese Windows ony activate or inactivate menu bar mode Home move cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl a Ctrl Shift a select all contents of active window End move cursor to the end of the line Ctrl e Ctrl f UNIX move cursor right one character Right Arrow Windows 286 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions Main and Source Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts Table 5 2 Keyboard Shortcuts cont Ctrl n move cursor one line down Source window only under Windows Ctrl p move cursor one line up Source window only under Windows Ctrl s UNIX find Ctrl f Windows Ctrl t reverse the order of the two characters on either side of the cursor Page Down move cursor down one screen Ctrl v UNIX only Ctrl x UNIX Only Ctrl UNIX undoes previous edits in the Source window Ctrl UNIX Ctrl z Windows Meta lt UNIX only move cursor to the beginning of the file Meta gt UNIX only move cursor to the end of the file Page Up move cursor up one screen Meta v UNIX only FR Performs a Find Next action in the Source window F4 Change focus to next pane in main window Shift F4 Change focus to previous pane in main window
14. ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual Software Version 10 2c 1991 2013 Mentor Graphics Corporation All rights reserved This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation The original recipient of this document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only provided that this entire notice appears in all copies In duplicating any part of this document the recipient agrees to make every reasonable effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information This document is for information and instruction purposes Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice and the reader should in all cases consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been made The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor Graphics whatsoever MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL INDIREC
15. e Command view locals Figure 4 40 Locals Window addr size set size word size size dy 5 ns line__ 43 5 data mem B atag_mem B valid_mem F alse False False False Locals Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Locals window Viewing Data in the Locals Window You cannot actively place information in the Locals window it is updated as you go through your simulation However there are several ways you can trigger the Locals window to be updated Run your simulation while debugging Select a Process from the Processes Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 170 Window Reference Locals Window e Select a Verilog function or task or VHDL function or procedure from the Call Stack Window GUI Elements of the Locals Window This section describes the GUI elements specific to the Locals Window Column Descriptions Table 4 36 Locals Window Columns lists the names of the immediately visible data objects This column also includes design object icons for the objects refer to the section Design Object Icons and Their Meanings for more information lists the current value s associated with each name State Count Not shown by default This column State Hits and State are all specific to coverage analysis State Hits Not shown by default State Not shown by default Popup Menu Right click anywhere in the Locals window to open a popup menu T
16. your left mouse button is used for panning the window and your middle mouse button is used for zooming the window Selecting Objects in the Dataflow Window When you select an object or objects it will be highlighted an orange color e Select a single object Single click e Select multiple objects Shift click on all objects you want to select or click and drag around all objects in a defined area Only available in Select Mode ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 125 Window Reference Dataflow Window Zooming the View of the Dataflow Window Several zoom controls are available for changing the view of the Dataflow window including mouse strokes toolbar icons and a mouse scroll wheel e Zoom Full Fills the Dataflow window with all visible data o Mouse stroke Up Left Middle mouse button in Select and Pan mode Left mouse button in Zoom mode o Menu DataFlow gt Zoom Full o Zoom Toolbar Zoom Full e Zoom Out o Mouse stroke Up Right Middle mouse button in Select and Pan mode Left mouse button in Zoom mode o Menu DataFlow gt Zoom Out o Zoom Toolbar Zoom Out o Mouse Scroll Push forward on the scroll wheel e Zoom In o Menu DataFlow gt Zoom In o Zoom Toolbar Zoom In o Mouse Scroll Pull back on the scroll wheel e Zoom Area Fills the Dataflow window with the data within the bounding box o Mouse stroke Down Right e Zoom Selected Fills the Dataflow win
17. 0 000 240000 state 9 1 i 1 HOTE Order of matching input pattern values state 2 state 4 state 9 F es Coverage Details of Toggle Coverage The Coverage Details window displays the following information about Toggle Coverage metrics 116 Instance the dataset name followed by the hierarchical location of the signal Only appears when you are analyzing coverage metrics by instance e Signal the name of the signal data 6 or data e Node Count The size of the signal Toggle List the list of toggles analyzed during simulation This list will differ depending on whether you specified extended toggle coverage Refer to the section Standard and Extended Toggle Coverage for more information o Toggle coverage shows toggle metrics between 0 and 1 o Extended toggle coverage shows toggle metrics between 0 1 and Z Toggle Coverage The percentage of nodes that were covered e 0 1 Coverage The percentage of standard toggles that were covered Full Coverage The percentage of extended toggles that were covered Z Coverage The percentage of toggles involving Z that were covered ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Coverage Details Window Toggle details are displayed as follows Figure 4 12 Coverage Details Window Showing Toggle Details 0 1 Coverage 21 004 Toggle Coverage 47 925 2 Coverage 60 944 Coverage Details of FSM Cover
18. 162 dashed 275 Dataflow window displaying in 124 sampling at clock change 166 types selecting which to view 191 values of displaying in Objects window 190 waveforms viewing 271 signals Filtering in the Objects window 191 Simulating viewing results in List window 150 Source textual connectivity 225 Source annotation 223 Annotation 223 source files Debug 223 Source highlighting customizing 237 Source window 215 clear highlights 219 code coverage data 220 colorization 237 inline search bar 236 tab stops in 237 lt Italic gt see also windows Source window Status bar Main window 36 Structure window find item 242 Subprograms filtering 244 symbols ATV window 93 Syntax highlighting 237 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c JKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ System Verilog 233 class methods conditional breakpoints 233 System Verilog types radix 273 T tab stops Source window 237 Tcl preference variables 305 Text filtering 28 Text editing 285 Textual connectivity in the Source window 225 Toolbar ATV 53 filter 28 toolbar ATV 54 Transcript colorize 255 command help 257 disable file creation 256 inline search bar 256 saving 254 saving as a DO file 254 Transcript window changing buffer size 255 changing line count 255 Triggers in List window 162 Triggers in the List window 165 U user_hook variable 297 308 User defined bus 162 User defined radix 299 d
19. AddMyMenus my_buttons The code above is available in the following modelsim tcl file lt install_dir gt examples gui addmenu modelsim tcl 298 Command Scmd2 Scmd3 variable myglobalvar onvalue 1 offvalue 0 indicatoron 1 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Customization User Defined Radices e Menu proc Adds a menu to the Main menu bar containing a top level item labeled Do My Own Thing which prints my_own_thing signals It adds a cascading submenu labeled changeCase with two entries To Upper and To Lower which echo my_to_upper and my_to_lower respectively The menu selection UserMenu gt Vars gt Feature One sets a checkbox that controls the value of myglobalvar signals one e Button proc Adds two buttons to the Standard tool bar Run Long runs the simulation for 2 us Run Short runs the simulation for 2 ns e The line lappend PrefMain user_hook AddMyMenus my_buttons appends the two procs AddMyMenus and my_ buttons to the user_hook variable when ModelSim is finished initializing Multiple procs are specified as a space separated list User Defined Radices A user definable radix is used to map bit patterns to a set of enumeration labels After defining a new radix the radix will be available for use in the List Watch and Wave windows or with the examine command There are four commands used to manage user defined radices radix defi
20. B PRODUCTS PROVIDED AT NO CHARGE OR C BETA CODE ALL OF WHICH ARE PROVIDED AS IS 7 2 THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 7 ARE EXCLUSIVE NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WITH RESPECT TO PRODUCTS PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LIMITATION OF LIABILITY EXCEPT WHERE THIS EXCLUSION OR RESTRICTION OF LIABILITY WOULD BE VOID OR INEFFECTIVE UNDER APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED FROM CUSTOMER FOR THE HARDWARE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 8 SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES IT IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR TESTING ITS PRODUCTS USED IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE
21. Customizing the Simulator GUI Layout for more information Configure Configure the layout specific behavior of the GUI Refer to the section Configure Window Layouts Dialog Box for more information Delete Delete a customized layout You can not delete any of the five standard layouts Select a standard or customized layout Bookmarks Menu Table 2 9 Bookmarks Menu Item Description Clicking this button bookmarks the current view of the Wave window Add Custom Opens the New Bookmark dialog box Opens the Manage Bookmarks dialog box Delete All e Active Window Only e All Windows Reload from File e Active Window Only e All Windows Window Menu Table 2 10 Window Menu Item Description Cascade Arrange all undocked windows These options do not impact Tile Horizontally any docked windows Tile Vertically Icon Children Minimize Icon or Maximize Deicon undocked windows Icon All These options do not impact any docked windows Deicon All ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 49 Menus Window Menu Table 2 10 Window Menu Item Description cont Show Toolbar Toggle the appearance of the Toolbar frame of the Main window Show Window Headers Toggle the appearance of the window headers Note that you will be unable to rearrange windows if you do not show the window headers FocusFollowsMouse Mouse pointer makes window active when pointer hovers in the window briefly Refer to S
22. Green state bubble Yellow state bubble Tan state bubble with double outline Gray diamond Transition box Black transition line ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Default appearance for non reset states Indicates the FSMs current state or the state of the wave cursor location when tracking the wave cursor Indicates the FSMs previous state or the state of the wave cursor location when tracking the wave cursor Indicates a reset state Indicates there are several transitions to reset with the same expression This is a placeholder to reduce the number of objects drawn in the window You can view all common expressions by selecting FSM View gt Transitions to reset gt Show All Contains information about the transition e Cond specifies the transition condition Count specifies the coverage count Indicates a transition 139 Window Reference FSM Viewer Window Table 4 26 FSM Viewer Window Graphical Elements cont Red transition line Indicates a transition that has zero 0 coverage 1 The condition format is based on the GUI_expression_format Operators Popup Menu Right click in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 27 FSM View Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem Transition Only available when right clicking on a transition Goto Source Opens the source file containing the state machine and highlights
23. Objectfilter Toolbar Figure 3 12 Mode Toolbar SEER Table 3 12 Mode Toolbar Buttons Select Mode Menu Dataflow or Set the left mouse button to Schematic gt select mode and middle mouse Mouse Mode gt Select Mode button to zoom mode Zoom Mode Menu Dataflow or Set left mouse button to zoom Schematic gt mode and middle mouse Mouse Mode gt Zoom Mode button to pan mode Pan Mode Menu Dataflow or Set left mouse button to pan Schematic gt mode and middle mouse Mouse Mode gt Pan Mode button to zoom mode Two Cursor Menu Wave gt Sets two cursors in Wave Mode Mouse Mode gt Two Cursor window First cursor moves with LMB second cursor with MMB Edit Mode Menu Wave or Dataflow gt Set mouse to Edit Mode Mouse Mode gt Edit Mode where you drag the left mouse button to select a range and drag the middle mouse button to Zoom Stop None Halt any drawing currently zE Drawing happening in the window Objectfilter Toolbar The Objectfilter toolbar provides filtering of design objects appearing in the Objects window Figure 3 13 Objectfilter Toolbar 1 o xo co au 2 62 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Precision Toolbar Table 3 13 Objectfilter Toolbar Buttons View Inputs None Changes the view of the Objects Window I Only to show inputs View None Changes the view of the Objects Window D Outputs Only to show outputs View Inouts None Changes the view
24. Toggle between expanding and restoring size of pane to fit the entire main window Shift F5 Toggle on off the pane headers F8 search for the most recent command that matches the characters typed Main window only ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 287 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions Main and Source Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts Table 5 2 Keyboard Shortcuts cont FLI Windows only FIZ Windows ony The Main window allows insertions or pastes only after the prompt therefore you don t need to set the cursor when copying strings to the command line List of Keyboard Shortcuts in GUI Windows You can open a dynamic list of keyboard shortcuts predetermined and user defined for most windows by entering Ctrl Shift Figure 5 4 Schematic Window Keyboard Shortcuts Schematic View Incremental Scroll Up Scroll Gown Scroll Left Scroll Right agm In Sty FMAM DFS 0 Jt H StH zoom ue zoom Full zoom Highlighted zoom Selected Toggle Highlight Remove Highlights KENN Toggle Mames KEMM KEMM Toggle Values Regenerate I 0 F H J a U N F Toggle Help meae You can create user defined keyboard shortcuts and change predetermined shortcuts Refer to User Defined Keyboard Shortcuts for more information 288 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions List Window Keyboard Shortcuts List Window Keyboard Shortcuts Using t
25. based on the current time which is set by the active cursor in the Wave window or the Current Time Label in the Source or Schematic windows Cell contents Show the internals of a library cell celldefine or VITAL Note Changing this Hierarchy option causes the Schematic window to be erased Current Time Label Displays the Current Time or the Now end of simulation time This is the time used to control state values annotated in the window For details see Current Time Label Figure 4 64 Current Time Label in the Schematic Window Minimize Maximize Button T 5275 na HP Redundant buffers Display redundant buffers Redundant inverters Displays redundant inverters Net Names Show all net names Wire corner Displays net names at or near wire corners Window Edge Displays net names only 1f net extends past the edge of the window The Net Expansion section of the dialog controls whether control logic is followed when doing an Expand To Fanin Fanout Max gate limit Specifies the maximum number of gates the fanin fanout should go through before stopping The default value is 1024 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 211 Window Reference Schematic Window Max hierarchy limit specifies the maximum number of hierarchy levels the fanin fanout should go through before stopping The default value 1s 32 Click the Information button at the bottom left corner to get option des
26. e Font Management e Find and Filter Functions Window Management The following tasks define actions you can take with the various windows Saving the Layout Upon Exit By default when you exit ModelSim the current layout is saved for a given design so that it appears the same the next time you invoke the tool Resetting the Window Layout to the Default The windows are customizable in that you can position and size them as you see fit and ModelSim will remember your settings upon subsequent invocations You can restore ModelSim windows and panes to their original settings by selecting Layout gt Reset in the menu bar Copying Text from a Window Header You can copy the title text in a window header by selecting it and right clicking to display a popup menu This is useful for copying the file name of a source file for use elsewhere see Figure 4 19 for an example of this in an FSM Viewer window Selecting the Active Window When the title bar of a window is highlighted solid blue it is the active window All menu selections will correspond to this active window You can change the active window in the following ways e default Click anywhere in a window or on its title bar e Move the mouse pointer into the window To turn on this feature select Window gt FocusFollowsMouse Default time delay for activating a window after the mouse cursor has entered the window is 300ms You can change the time delay with the PrefMai
27. the number of times the conditions in a level and all levels under that level have been executed 246 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Structure Window Table 4 55 Columns in the Structure Window cont Column name Description FEC UDP Files window the number of FEC or UDP conditions in a file that Conditions missed were not executed Structure window the number of conditions in a level and all levels under that level that were not executed FEC UDP the current ratio of FEC UDP Condition hits to FEC UDP Condition Condition rows FEC UDP a bar chart displaying the FEC or UDP Condition if the percentage 1s Condition graph below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable FEC UDP Files window the number of executable expressions in each file Expression rows Structure window the number of executable expressions in each level and all levels subsumed under that level FEC UDP Files window the number of times expressions in a file have been Expressions hit executed Structure window the number of times expressions in a level and each level under that level have been executed FEC UDP Files window the number of executable expressions in a file that were Expressions missed not executed Structure window the number of executable expressions in a level and al
28. v10 2c K Keyboard shortcuts user defined 282 keyboard shortcuts List window 289 Main window 285 Source window 285 Wave window 289 a Language templates 226 Layout columns 56 296 Link cursors 276 List pane lt Italic gt see also pane List pane List window 150 expanded time viewing 153 setting triggers 165 Load breakpoints 233 Locals window 170 lt Italic gt see also windows Locals window M Macros DO files creating from a saved transcript 254 Memories navigation 173 save to WLF file 179 saving formats 179 selecting memory instances 178 viewing contents 178 viewing multiple instances 178 Memory tab memories you can view 176 Menus user defined 297 menus user defined 308 Message Viewer Display Options dialog box 188 Message Viewer tab 182 Messages 182 Mismatching coverage numbers 222 Missed Coverage pane 108 315 ABCDEFGH I MODELSIM_PREFERENCES variable 308 modelsim tcl 308 user_defined menus 297 308 user defined buttons 297 308 mouse shortcuts Main window 285 Source window 285 Wave window 289 msgmode variable 182 N Nets Dataflow window displaying in 124 values of displaying in Objects window 190 waveforms viewing 271 Notepad windows text editing 285 notrigger argument 166 0 Objects window 190 P preference variables editing 305 saving 305 Preferences schematic 210 preferences saving 305
29. 0 0 2 20 00 ee een eee eens 65 Picure 5 10 Simulate Tool Dai 1 224 00he044eo were eet hees eee eeeeeaeahenae es 66 Figure 3 19 Show Cause Dropdown Menu 00 eee eens 69 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 9 List of Figures Picure 5 20 SOURCE POONA not acdeunesurdivne acteunesaeeturstastannesunes 70 Figure 3 21 Standard Toolbar 2 2 0 0 eee eee ees 70 Figure 3 22 Add Selected to Window Dropdown Menu 000 eee 72 Figure 3 23 Sep Toolbar 2224 05 rriren ea Ge ie eee a ae ek Gow he one 73 Figure 3 24 Wave Toolbar cic22065600becbeonatewee bed badaeeeetenee bee eadaes 74 Figure 5 25 Wave Compare Toolbar s 6 lt 60 onacc65 452540806 OD4 eH OSE eae dw Se 76 Figure 3 26 Wave Cursor Toolbar 20 0 0 een nee ees 11 Figure 3 27 Wave Edit Toolbar se resssisiresrsernsssa cee eee eees 78 Figure 3 28 Wave Expand Time Toolbar 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 79 Pisure gt 2 200ml Tool Dai esere erene reie ener EN yuna set sae h eE 79 Figure 3 30 Tabbed Toolbars and Overflow Menu 0 0c eee eee ee 81 Figure 3 31 Window Specific Buttons 0 0 eens 82 Figure 4 1 Assertions WindOW 1 cee eee eee nere 86 Figure 4 2 ATV Window 0 ccc eee e ene eee eee eees 92 Figure 4 3 Call Stack Window 2 2 cee nnn ees 95 Figure 4 4 Capacity Window 0 0 cc nent e eens 97 Figure 4 5 Class Graph Window 0 cee eee nee eens 100 Figure 4 6 Class
30. 12 2 Upon termination of this Agreement the rights and obligations of the parties shall cease except as expressly set forth in this Agreement Upon termination Customer shall ensure that all use of the affected Products ceases and shall return hardware and either return to Mentor Graphics or destroy Software in Customer s possession including all copies and documentation and certify in writing to Mentor Graphics within ten business days of the termination date that Customer no longer possesses any of the affected Products or copies of Software in any form EXPORT The Products provided hereunder are subject to regulation by local laws and United States U S government agencies which prohibit export re export or diversion of certain products information about the products and direct or indirect products thereof to certain countries and certain persons Customer agrees that it will not export or re export Products in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local and U S government agencies If Customer wishes to disclose any information to Mentor Graphics that is subject to any U S or other applicable export restrictions including without limitation the U S International Traffic in Arms Regulations ITAR or special controls under the Export Administration Regulations EAR Customer will notify Mentor Graphics personnel in advance of each instance of disclosure that such information is subject to su
31. 19 Overview General GUI Tasks Figure 1 4 Window Undock Button Objects Column Based Windows This section describes tasks related to column based windows throughout the GUI Customizing the Column Views You can customize the display of columns column based windows and then save these views for later use Procedure 1 Right click in the column headings and select Configure Column Layout This displays the Configure Column Layout dialog box a Select Create This displays the Create Column Layout dialog box i Layout Name enter a name for the layout for future reference 11 Column Selections move columns to your desired state i Click OK b Your new layout is added to the Layouts list c Click Done After applying your selections the rearranged columns and custom layouts are saved and appear when you next open that column view in the window Bookmarks You can create bookmarks that allow you to return to a specific view or place in your design for some of the windows The bookmarks you make can be saved and automatically restored Some of the windows that allow bookmarking include the Structure Files Objects Wave and Objects windows Working with Bookmarks The Bookmarks toolbar and the Bookmarks menu give you access to the following bookmarking features e Add Bookmarks 20 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General GUI Tasks Bookmarks are added to an active window by sele
32. 218 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Highlighted Text in a Source Window The Source window can display text that is highlighted as a result of various conditions or operations such as the following e Double clicking an error message in the transcript shown during compilation Using Event Traceback gt Show Driver e Coverage related operations In these cases the relevant text in the source code is shown with a persistent highlighting To remove this highlighted display choose More gt Clear Highlights from the right click popup menu of the Source window If the Source window is docked you can also perform this action by selecting Source gt More gt Clear Highlights from the Main menu If the window is undocked select Edit gt Advanced gt Clear Highlights Note i Clear Highlights does not affect text that you have selected with the mouse cursor Example To produce a compile error that displays highlighted text in the Source window do the following 1 Choose Compile gt Compile Options 2 In the Compiler Options dialog box click either the VHDL tab or the Verilog amp SystemVerilog tab 3 Enable Show source lines with errors and click OK 4 Open a design file and create a known compile error such as changing the word entity to entry or module to nodule 5 Choose Compile gt Compile and then complete the Compile Sour
33. Any Transition to cycle strings Long search times through these options result in the display of a stop icon you can use to cancel the search Search Previous Shift Enter Searches for the next Previous Next Next enter occurrence of the string either backward or forward in time from the cursor Search Dropdown button to Options e Change Mode value rising edge falling edge or any transition e Display the Wave Signal Search Dialog Box for advanced search behavior e Clear the value history Using the Wave Search Box You can use the Wave Search box to search the timeline of a selected signal for transitions to a specific value or just for transitions themselves ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 15 Toolbars Wave Compare Toolbar 1 Select a signal in the left hand side of the Wave window 2 Place a wave cursor where you want to begin the search 3 Enter a value in the Wave Search box The value must be of a compatible format type for the signal you selected Alternatively you can use the Search Options button to change the mode from value to Rising Edge Falling Edge or Any Transition This populates the Wave Search box with the selected transition type 4 Use the Search Reverse or Search Forward buttons to locate the next occurrence of the value or transition For large simulations if the search takes a long time the Wave Search box will display a stop icon you can click to stop the
34. Compie Simul Add Wave Took Layout Window Help Jee oS MBs eC iiki j al a wre proct Fast 4 ago andet gf ii aile g amp E iia A m SN pia D ASSN procit FASS pocie E SN pocite Hii HOTAT procifast H oer paciia Hi AaS procio E wD T paat Poa DP PP e068 pocet Prou j Ei c cacheiiat Mod Em memorye i g FINTIALF L i iD ALWAYS topia Prisca EX ateinn_copacityar Foret i oP Reading foo sAirr F if cro Read hit to set J T Read Write teat done F re Gote stip i pooc 2 94 i Tiet 2820 me lteceatien 1 Instance topsp F Uriak in Bodule pr ge prc dine 4 1307 ns to 2067 re The Main window contains a menu bar toolbar frame windows tab groups and a status bar which are described in the following sections Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to many tasks available for your workflow Figure 1 13 shows the selection in the menu bar that changes based on whichever window is currently active The menu items that are available and how certain menu items behave depend on which window is active For example 1f the Structure window is active and you choose Edit from the menu bar the Clear command is disabled However if you click in the Transcript window and choose Edit the Clear command is enabled The active window is denoted by a blue title bar ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 31 Overview General
35. FSM Viewer window Null g verilog system verilog name event Objects You Can View in the Wave Window The following types of objects can be viewed in the Wave window e VHDL objects indicated by a dark blue diamond signals aliases process variables and shared variables e Verilog objects indicated by a light blue diamond nets registers variables and named events The GUI displays inout variables of a clocking block separately where the output of the inout variable is appended with __o for example you would see following two objects clock1 c1 input portion of the inout cl clock cl o output portion of the inout cl 278 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Wave Window This display technique also applies to the Objects window e Verilog and SystemVerilog transactions indicated by a blue four point star see for more information SystemC objects indicated by a green diamond primitive channels and ports indicated by a green four point star transaction streams and their element e Virtual objects indicated by an orange diamond virtual signals buses and functions see Virtual Objects for more information e Comparison objects indicated by a yellow triangle comparison region and comparison signals see Waveform Compare for more information SystemVerilog and PSL assertions indicated by a light blue SVA or magenta PSL triangle see Viewing
36. Figure 4 101 Wave Window Message Bar 0 0 2 0 ccc nee eens 211 Figure 4 102 View Objects Window Dropdown Menu 0 0 eee eee 278 Figure 5 1 Keyboard Shortcuts for Source Window 0 0 eee eee eee eee 281 Figure 5 2 Keyboard Shortcuts Dialog Box 2 0 kee eens 282 Figure 5 3 Add Keyboard Shortcut Dialog Box 0 0 0 ee nee 284 Figure 5 4 Schematic Window Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 0 288 Figure 6 1 Configure Column Layout Dialog 0 0 ee eee 296 Figure 6 2 Edit Column Layout Dialog 0 0 0 cc eee nee 297 Figure 6 3 Create Column Layout Dialog 0 0 eens 297 Figure 6 4 User Defined Buttons and Menus 0 cece eee eee eens 298 Figure 6 5 User Defined Radix States in the Wave Window 00000 300 Figure 6 6 User Defined Radix States in the List Window 00000 301 Figure 6 7 Setting the Global Signal Radix 0 0 cee 302 Figure 6 8 Fixed Point Radix Dialog 20 0 cen ees 303 Figure 7 1 Change Text Fonts for Selected Windows 0 0 e eee eee eee 306 Figure 7 2 Making Global Font Changes 0 0 ccc eee eens 307 Figure 7 3 Persistent Buttons and Menus 2 0 cc ccc eee eens 309 Figure 7 4 Modifying Signal Display Attributes in the Wave Window 311 12 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c List of Tables Table 1 1 Scribble Mode Menu
37. Instances Window 0 eee eee eens 102 Figure 4 7 Class Tree Window 2 0 cee ees 104 Figure 4 8 Code Coverage Analysis 0 0 0 0c e eens 106 Figure 4 9 Missed Coverage in Code Coverage Analysis Windows 109 Figure 4 10 Cover Directives Window 0 cece eee ee eas 111 Figure 4 11 Coverage Details Window Showing Expression Truth Table 116 Figure 4 12 Coverage Details Window Showing Toggle Details 117 Figure 4 13 Coverage Details Window Showing FSM Details 118 Figure 4 14 Covergroups WindoW 0 ccc eee teen nets 119 Figure 4 15 Dataflow Window 0 cece ee eeen 125 Figure 4 16 Dataflow Window and Panes 0 0 ccc eee eens 127 Figure 4 17 Piles WinGOW lt ccectaceconeheddadedtaseroaehndaegedtsaecoaa aes 129 Figure 4 15 FSM List Wimd0W 6 vicesceevedauneesvacesarexed anecevernsaernuan 132 Figure 4 19 FSM Viewer Window 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 135 Figure 4 20 Combining Common Transition Conditions 00 cee ee eee 138 Figure 4 21 Instance Coverage Window 0 ccc ene e eens 142 Figure 4 22 Filter Instance List Dialog Box 2 0 ce ee eee 143 Figure 4 23 Library Window ies pice acie mi iiaa aia eee eee ees 148 Figure 4 24 Tabular Format of the List Window 0 0 cece eee eens 150 Prone 4 25 List WintOW ns erer otre enere e ee ner ERSS NES E
38. List Menu cont Popup Menu Ten Options Displays the FSM Display Options dialog box which allows you to control e how FSM information is added to the Wave Window e how much information is shown in the Instance Column 134 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c FSM Viewer Window Use this window to graphically analyze finite state machines in your design Prerequisites e Analyze FSMs and their coverage data you must specify cover or explicitly cover f during compilation and coverage on the vsim command line to fully analyze FSMs with coverage data e Analyze FSMs without coverage data you must specify acc or explicitly tacc f during compilation vcom vlog or optimization vopt to analyze FSMs with the FSM Viewer window Accessing Access the window e From the FSM List window double click on the FSM you want to analyze From the Objects Locals Wave or Code Coverage Analyze s FSM Analysis windows click on the FSM button Ey for the FSM you want to analyze Figure 4 19 FSM Viewer Window simiftest smism seqiism Ostate Hr 1 m Now gt o gt Count 32 _ Count AD a Count 41 Count O L nt Count 16 Count 16 Fi Count 16 t ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 135 Window Reference FSM Viewer Window FSM Viewer Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the FSM Viewer window Using the Mouse in the FSM Viewer These mouse operat
39. ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Column Layout Toolbar Table 3 3 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons Command Wave window Clicking this button only bookmark add wave bookmarks the current view of Menu Wave window only the active window Add gt To Wave gt Bookmark Click and hold the button to open a drop down menu with the following options e Add Current View e Add Custom e Set Default Action Delete All Command Wave window Removes all bookmarks after Bookmarks only bookmark delete wave prompting for your all confirmation Click and hold the button to open a drop down menu with the following options e Active Window e All Windows 7 Manage None Displays the Manage hy Bookmarks Bookmarks dialog box Reload from None Reloads bookmarks from the bookmarks do file Set Default Action Jump to Command Wave window Displays bookmarks grouped Bookmark only bookmark goto wave by window Select the lt name gt bookmark you want to display Column Layout Toolbar The Column Layout toolbar allows you to specify the column layout for the active window Figure 3 4 Column Layout Toolbar Configure ColumnbLayout ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 55 Toolbars Compile Toolbar Table 3 4 Change Column Toolbar Buttons Column Menu A dropdown box that ColurmmLayout 11Coverace Layout Verification allows you to specify the Browser gt column layout for the Configure
40. Olan whi Linenmber w fis o oko x SMa oe wicascisensicivell wi eeics When you select OK or Apply the Message Viewer is updated to contain only those messages that meet the criteria defined in the Message Viewer Filter dialog box Also when selecting OK or Apply the Transcript window will contain an echo of the messages setfilter command where the argument is a Tcl definition of the filter You can then cut paste this command for reuse at another time ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 189 Objects Window Use this window to view the names and current values of declared data objects in the current region as selected in the Structure window Data objects include Accessing constants and variables not declared in a process parameters transactions SystemC member data variables Access the window using either of the following Menu item View gt Objects Command view objects Wave window View Objects Window Button Figure 4 48 Objects Window Objects Name Value Kind Mode A data_width 32 h00 Para Internal addr width 32h00 Para Internal BA addr i2hO15 Net In indk hi i In outdk i hi i In gt we ho i In A data_out Sh7a Pack Out 4 mem ixed Internal ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Questa Verification IP objects Refer to the section Questa Verification IP Objects in the GUI for more information 190 Window
41. Once you select the options data will update as the simulation runs and processes change their states When the In Region view mode is selected data will update according to the region selected in the Structure window Viewing the Full Path of the Process By default all processes are displayed without the full hierarchical context path You can display processes with the full path by selecting Process gt Show Full Path Viewing Processes in Post Processing Mode This window also shows data in the post processing WLE view or Coverage view mode You will need to log processes in the simulation mode to be able to view them in post processing mode In the post processing mode the default selection values will be same as the default values in the live simulation mode Things to remember about the post processing mode ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 197 Window Reference Processes Window There are no active processes so the Active view mode selection will not show anything All processes will have same Done state in the post processing mode There is no order information so the Order column will show for all processes Setting a Ready Process as the Next Active Process You can select any Ready process and set it to be the next Active process executed by the simulator ahead of any other queued processes To do this simply right click any Ready process and select Set Next Active from t
42. Prefill text entry find 26 PrefMemory ExpandPackedMem variable 178 R Radix change in Watch pane 269 color example 301 List window 159 set globally 191 273 302 setting fixed point 302 setting for Objects window 191 302 user defined 299 definition body 299 radix 316 JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ SystemVerilog types 273 Radix define command setting radix color 301 Recursive display mode 113 Registers values of displaying in Objects window 190 waveforms viewing 271 Regular expression 29 restart command in GUI 46 Restoring window format 24 162 S Save breakpoints 233 saveLines preference variable 255 Saving window format 24 162 Scaling fonts 25 Schematic click and sprout 206 display preferences 210 views 206 Schematic window add objects to incr view 208 Search in Structure window 242 inline search bar Source window 236 Transcript 256 prefill text entry field 26 Search bar 25 Searching Expression Builder 156 Setting radix fixed point 302 Shared library building in SystemC 45 Shortcuts text editing 285 shortcuts List window 289 Main window 285 Source window 285 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c ABCDEFGH I Wave window 289 Show All Contexts display mode 113 Signal format Wave window 274 Signal radix for Objects window Objects window setting signal radix 191 302 set globally 191 273 302 Signals combine into bus
43. Reference Objects Window Objects Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Objects window Interacting with Other Windows 1 Click an entry in the window to highlight that object in the Dataflow Schematic and Wave windows 2 Double click an entry to highlights that object in a Source window Setting Signal Radix You can set the signal radix for a selected signal or signals in the Objects window as follows 1 Click LMB a signal to select it or use Ctrl Click Shift Click to select a group of signals 2 Select Objects gt Radix from the menu bar or right click the selected signal s and select Radix from the popup menu This opens the Signal Radix dialog box Figure 4 49 where you may select a radix This sets the radix for the selected signal s in the Objects window and every other window where the signal appears Figure 4 49 Setting the Global Signal Radix from the Objects Window Signal Radix E4 Signal testi rrw Specify radix to apply to the selected signals f None fuse session default Symbolic Binary Octal Decimal Unsigned Hexadecimal ASCII oe ee s ee 6 Time Show Base OK Cancel Apply Finding Contents of the Objects Window You can filter the contents of the Objects window by either the Name or Value columns ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 191 Window Reference Objects Window 1 Ctrl F to display the Find box at the bottom of the
44. Setting this value to zero Q saves all lines Line Prefix Allows you to change the character s that precedes the lines in the transcript Update Rate Allows you to change the length of time in ms between transcript refreshes ModelSim Prompt Allows you to change the string used for the command line prompt VSIM Prompt Allows you to change the string used for the simulation prompt Paused Prompt Allows you to change the string used for when the simulation is paused Transcript Toolbar Items When undocked the Transcript window allows access to the following toolbars e Standard Toolbar e Help Toolbar 258 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Verification Management Browser Window Use the Verification Management Browser window to display summary information for original test results in UCDBs ranking files and merged test results in a UCDB You can also use it to has a feature for customizing and saving the organization of the tabs It also supports features for re running tests generating HTML reports from test results and executing merges and test ranking For details on how the Total Coverage column statistics are calculated see Calculation of Total Coverage Coverage numbers presented in all columns are by instance not by file Accessing e GUI View gt Verification Management gt Browser Shell or vsim command prompt view testbrowser Figure 4 90 shows the Verification Browser window u
45. Tree Ga Es ES laas Type Fle nique td Scope xbus_skatus Extends ovim_object Methods fis create get object type toa get_ type Class xbus_bus_monito Class ovm object svh Function Function static Function fia get type name Function fos rm Field automation fia new Properties H xbus_transfer Class 4 Function Function xbus_transfer s Accessing e Select View gt Class Browser gt Class Tree e Use the command view classtree GUI Elements of the Class Tree Window This section describes the GUI elements specific to the Class Tree window Icons Table 4 12 Class Tree Window Icons Parameterized Class ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 104 Window Reference Class Tree Window Table 4 12 Class Tree Window Icons cont Column Descriptions Table 4 13 Class Tree Window Columns Unique Id The internal name of the parameterized class only available with parameterized classes Scope The scope of the covergroup only available with covergroups Popup Menu Items Table 4 14 Class Tree Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem View Declaration Highlights the line of code where the item 1s declared opening the source file if necessary View as Graph Displays the class and any dependent classes in the Class Graph window only available for classes allows you to filter out methods and or properties Organize by Base Extended Class reorganizes the
46. User Defined Radices Setting Global Signal Radix The Global Signal Radix feature allows you to set the radix for a selected signal or signals in the active window and in other windows where the signal appears The Global Signal Radix can be set from the Locals Objects Schematic or Wave windows as follows Select a signal or group of signals Right click the selected signal s and click the following popup menu option O O O O Objects Window Radix Locals Window Global Signal Radix Wave Window Radix gt Global Signal Radix Schematic Window Edit gt Global Signal Radix This opens the Global Signal Radix dialog box Figure 6 7 where you may select a radix This sets the radix for the selected signal s in the active window and every other window where the signal appears Figure 6 7 Setting the Global Signal Radix xi Signal top praddr Specify a radix to apply to the selected signal It will be used For this signal in all windows Mone fuse session default Symbolic Binary Octal Decimal Unsigned Hexadecimal ASCII Time ee ceeeeen OK Cancel Apply Setting a Fixed Point Radix Fixed point types are used in VHDL and SystemC to represents non integer numbers without using a floating point format ModelSim automatically recognizes VHDL sfixed and ufixeda types as well as SystemC SC_FIXED and SC_UFIXED types and displays them correctly with a fixed point format 302 Mo
47. Wilsonville Oregon 97070 7777 Telephone 503 685 7000 Toll Free Telephone 800 592 2210 Website www mentor com SupportNet supportnet mentor com Send Feedback on Documentation supportnet mentor com doc_feedback_form Table of Contents Chapter 1 0S lo ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 17 Genera Gl Tasks 2446 enaeeeye pen eee ee nas ees pee Ge sree ESEE TEE eas 17 Window Management 2 0 ee eee e eee ene e eens 18 Column Based Windows 0 0 0 00 ccc ee eee eee e eee eens 20 BOOKIMGEKS seneye Gans need 45 46 pea Ge REE Hs Hes Gea Ree He He eee Ges Se 20 seele loa 6 6 cs ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 24 Font Management 4 46 4 ou docee 666 den eae ee eee oe Hee ene see EE Hea ene A 25 Find and Filter Functions 0 0 0 00 ne nent ene eee ees 25 General V istal ICMGINS e erreari emaa arte doe Gh oe Ge aes id oe de GG ow Head ee ee dee Gd 30 Elements of the Main Window 0 0 ee nee ene e ene 30 Design Object Icons and Their Meanings 0 0 00 cee ee eens 37 Window Time Display 0 0 ee eee tenn ee eens 38 Chapter 2 fo a a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee er ee ee eee 41 Window specific Menu 6 ee eee eee ee ee ee eens 4 Pu MCWU sot cag ease ee ATEREA SEERA TEESE 42 PACU INICIO amp escars amp a 4 Ger sip E awe amp E aS eae E oe nee Hae ETE 44 WICW MCh EE E EE E 44 Comple MEM eeaeee eaea e E E rA 45 SMUE MeN 63s eae ee dee ee ee eae ee ee E ee as 45 POG WEG earar EErEE EEE EEEE eee ae oa E eee ee
48. Window Popup Menu 0 0 cc cece eee eens 171 Table 4 38 Memory Data Popup Menu Address Pane 0 000000 00s 174 Table 4 40 Memory Data Menu ee nrnna nnee 175 Table 4 39 Memory Data Popup Menu Data Pane 2 0 0 eee eee 175 Table 4 41 Memory Identification 2 0 0 ccc een eens 176 14 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c List of Tables Table 4 42 Memory List Window Columns 0 0 cece eee eens 180 Table 4 43 Memory List Popup Menu 2 0 0 ce eee ene 180 Table 4 44 Memories Menu ce eee eee e eens 181 Table 4 45 Message Viewer Tasks 2 0 ccc cee eee e eas 184 Table 4 46 Message Viewer Window Columns 0 e eee eens 185 Table 4 47 Message Viewer Window Popup Menu 0 0 cee eee eee 187 Table 4 48 Objects Window Popup Menu 0 0 cc eee eee 192 Table 4 49 Toggle Coverage Columns in the Objects Window 005 194 Table 4 50 Processes Window Column Descriptions 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 199 Table 4 51 Profile Calltree Window Column Descriptions 0000000 204 Table 4 52 Schematic Window Popup Menu 0 eee eee eens 212 Table 4 53 Source Window Code Coverage Indicators nannu c eee eee 222 Table 4 54 Structure Window Popup Menu 0 c cece eee eee eens 240 Table 4 55 Columns in the Structure Window 0 cc eee
49. ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZIZ wire 5 rw rw r Strb strb r Sti 1 Sti 1 Turn on source annotation by selecting Source gt Show Source Annotation or by right clicking a source file and selecting Show Source Annotation Note that transitions are displayed only for those signals that you have logged To analyze the values at a given time of the simulation you can either e Show the signal values at the current simulation time This is the default behavior The window automatically updates the values as you perform a run or a single step action Show the signal values at current cursor position in the Wave window You can switch between these two settings by performing the following actions e When Docked o Source gt Examine Now o Source gt Examine Current Cursor e When Undocked o Tools gt Options gt Examine Now o Tools gt Options gt Examine Current Cursor You can highlight a specific signal in the Wave window by double clicking on an annotation value in the source file 224 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Accessing Textual Connectivity Information The Source window contains textual connectivity information that allows you to explore the connectivity of your design though the source code This feature is especially useful when used with source annotation turned on When you double click an instance name in the Structure sim window a Source window will open at the approp
50. a column for branch code conditional if then else and case statements Xr indicates that the true condition of the branch was not executed Xp indicates that the false condition of the branch was not executed Fractional numbers indicate how many case statement labels were executed When you right click any item in the window a pop up menu appears with options to control the addition or removal of coverage exclusions The options and their function is identical to that of the Source Window See Methods for Excluding Objects for a description of adding comments with exclusions Note __ Multi line objects are rooted in the last line and exclusions must be applied on that line in order to take effect See Coverage Details Window for a description of the type of detailed information viewed in the Details window for each coverage type 110 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Cover Directives Window The Cover Directives window displays a list of SystemVerilog and PSL embedded and external cover directives that were successfully compiled and simulated during the current simulation Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Coverage gt Cover Directives Command view coverdirectives Figure 4 10 Cover Directives Window A Cover Directives fs Ee FiNeme Language Enabled Log Count AtLeast Limit Weight Cmplt Cmplt graph BA Hinterleaver
51. a scrolls window to very top or scroll bar arrow bottom vertical scroll or far left or right horizontal scroll Click middle mouse button in scroll bar scrolls window to position of UNIX only click Shift scroll with middle mouse button 1 If you choose Wave gt Mouse Mode gt Zoom Mode you do not need to press the Ctrl key Table 5 5 Wave Window Keyboard Shortcuts bring into view and center the currently active cursor i zoom in Shift 1 mouse pointer must be over the cursor or waveform panes O zoom out Shift o mouse pointer must be over the cursor or waveform panes f zoom full Shift f mouse pointer must be over the cursor or waveform panes l zoom last Shift 1 mouse pointer must be over the cursor or waveform panes r zoom range Shift r mouse pointer must be over the cursor or waveform panes m zooms all open Wave windows to the zoom range of the active window Up Arrow scrolls entire window up or down one line when mouse Down Arrow pointer is over waveform pane scrolls highlight up or down one line when mouse pointer is over pathname or values pane Left Arrow scroll pathname values or waveform pane left 290 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions Wave Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts Table 5 5 Wave Window Keyboard Shortcuts cont scroll pathname values or waveform pane right Tab search forward right to the next transition
52. a shortcut is defined it will be available in all subsequent invocations of the tool The dynamic nature of the architecture makes the keyboard shortcuts available to any tool that is based upon the ModelSim GUI such as ADMS O In MVC and Codelink The Keyboard Shortcuts Dialog Box The Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box lists all existing keyboard shortcuts The dialog distinguishes between shortcuts that are user defined and shortcuts that come predefined in the tool Figure 5 2 Figure 5 2 Keyboard Shortcuts Dialog Box Keyboard Shortcuts F ShortcutType ShortcutKey Operation Type _ Origin tH Global Shortcuts Bia Dataflow Window hi Library Window Objects Window user defined Chl c Jveop Action AllowActivation a Script pre defined Crl o add2dataflow Action pre defined Ciol w add wave anchor Action img Schematic Window Source Window EHE Structure Window He Transcript Window gg Wave Window The Keyboard Shortcuts Dialog Box allows you to e Add a new user defined keyboard shortcut Refer to Creating A Keyboard Shortcut for more information 282 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions User Defined Keyboard Shortcuts e Modify an existing keyboard shortcut Any shortcut can be modified including predefined shortcuts e Delete a shortcut Import shortcuts from a previously saved bindings do file You can also reload the keyboard shortcuts fi
53. active window Column Layout The Column Layout dropdown menu allows you to select pre defined column layouts for the active window For example the layouts you can select for the Verification Management Browser Window include e AllColumns displays all available columns Default displays only columns that are displayed by default e CodeCoverageRanked displays all columns related to ranked code coverage results FunctionalCoverageRanked displays all columns related to ranked functional coverage results e AllCoverage displays all columns related to coverage statistics TestData displays all columns containing data about the test including information about how and when the coverage data was generated e Testplan displays all columns containing data about the testplan including Testplan Section Coverage Link Type Goal of Goal Weight e AllCoverageRanked displays all columns related to ranking results e FunctionalCoverage displays all columns related to functional coverage statistics e CodeCoverage displays all columns related to code coverage statistics Configure ColumnLayout opens the Configure Column Layout dialog which allows you to create edit remove copy or rename a column layout See Configuring the Column Layout Compile Toolbar The Compile toolbar provides access to compile and simulation actions Figure 3 5 Compile Toolbar 56 Mode
54. by selecting the window from the View menu Choosing Global or a specific window changes the options available in the Shortcut Key Operation field and the dynamically populated field to the right 5 Enter the key combination in the Shortcut Key field Or select the Change Entry Mode button to enter a key combination 6 Choose the type of operation the shortcut will execute 284 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions Main and Source Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts o A Popup or Pulldown Menu Opens the Menu Items dialog with a hierarchical list of all popup and pulldown menu items available either globally or for the window specified in step 4 o A Toolbar button Opens the Toolbar Buttons dialog with a hierarchical list of all toolbar button actions available either globally or for the window specified in step 4 o General Tcl script Selecting this option opens the Tcl Script field to the right You can enter any Tcl script or command line sequence o An Internal window command This choice is available only for window specific commands Refer to step 4 Opens the Window Action dialog on the right with a list of all window specific commands Main and Source Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts The following mouse actions and special keystrokes can be used to edit commands in the entry region of the Main window They can also be used in editing the file displayed in the Source
55. ce ce ee ee ee eee eee ee eee ee eee ae 111 GUI Elements of the Cover Directives Window 0 0 111 Cover Directives Window Tasks 0 0 0 eee ee ee ee eee eee eee ees 112 Coverage Details WiidOW en ons aectnewene sues eee ge ws nese es aeeaeeseaseu 114 Covergroups Window 0 cc eee eee ee eee ee eens 119 4 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Table of Contents GUI Elements of the Covergroups Window 0000s 120 Covergroups Window Tasks 0 0 ccc eee eee eens 122 DatanlOw WMOOW o4 04 6esndesieusaaesosagadesieusanesusagadcsiousaeeerts 124 Dataflow Window Tasks 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee e eens 125 Pres WiINdOW 2 secceeeeagedaecea se apauea ese neuneee ehouae ene een p eae heen yee 129 GUI Elements of the Files Window 0 0 cee ens 129 FSM Last WindOW so 2424454640400 hobdoe000e4n00 an hboaetaeeendeetebdanene 132 GUI Elements of the FSM List Window 0 0 0 ccc eens 132 FSM Viewer Wind0W v0 i40cecetedohudetavenedetayeantelawtdageds ee awk odes 135 FSM Viewer Window VasKS 3 04 080d254 2000o449 200 hehe e eed ee pa heke oe 136 GUI Elements of the FSM Viewer Window 0 0 ccc cee eens 139 Instance Coverage WindOW s sc lt es0vecnc0so be eedeed veneers eeeatasdvaawava a 142 Instance Coverage Window Tasks 0 0 00 eee ene eens 142 GUI Elements of the Instance Coverage Window 0 0 e eee ees 143 library WINdOW 26 4c uns seen sedoa cast
56. code coverage indicator icon is provided in Table 4 53 Figure 4 68 Coverage in Source Window h ee cov eragertest sy by file Vun 7 x Hits BC Ln low H 36 parameter onep _ aa ae 309 calculation method 40 initial begin 1 Al a 1 bO a 200 a 1 bi RMB to add edit 100 a 1 bhd eee M wf comments with 200 a 1 bi Hover over item Fd aripii 100 a 1 bO H coverage s appear in Pa 100 Hits and BC column WoO WF aA if 1 bl amp amp ong item highlights in blue 46 SdispLlay Iree My 49 else 50 sdisplayi Not in 1 pil amp amp onec w i l if fonep amp 1 b1 vv 52 Si sp Lay p m s sa i En 53 else Pink highlight applied to 54 begin Statements or Branches Es r display with missed coverage ET assert fonep amp amp 1 bi else displayt assert lb amp amp 1 bl else displayt 500 stop end 4 Click to viewin Details window d mo o O 2 P S Analysis h testsy by file alel To see more information about any coverage item click on the indicator icon or in the Hits or BC column for the line of interest In the case of a multiple line item this would be last line of 220 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window the item If the Coverage Details window is open this brings up detailed coverage information for that line If the window is not open a right click menu option is a
57. coverpoint cross and covergroup instance objects not including illegal ignore or default bins Transient Memory the transient memory used by the covergroup Weight the weighting of a covergroup instance for computing the overall instance coverage simulation For coverpoints or crosses it shows the weighting of a coverpoint or cross for computing the instance coverage of the enclosing covergroup Weighted Missing Bins the number of weighted bins missing coverage ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 121 Window Reference Covergroups Window Popup Menu Items Table 4 19 Covergroup Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tiem Opens the selected file in a Source window Report Creates a functional coverage report in text or XML of selected items Hide Covergroup Instances Hides from the display e All covergroup instances only covergroups with per_instance set to 0 Use CrossPrintMissing Uses the value of option cross_num_print_missing while displaying bins of covergroup cross scope Show Zero Weight Objects Displays all objects with zero weighting Test Analysis Executes coverage analyze on the selected instance and prints information to the Test Analysis window Find Least Coverage Find Most Coverage Find Zero Coverage Find Non Zero Coverage Summary XML Import Hint Displays the XML Import Hint dialog box containing information about the Link Type and Link Name Filter Setup Opens the Filter Setup dial
58. custom layout you wish to delete 4 Delete Configuring Default Windows for Restored Layouts The Window Restore Properties Dialog Box allows you to specify which windows will be restored when a layout is reloaded 1 Select Layout gt Configure to open the Configure Window Layouts dialog box 2 Click the Window Restore Properties button to open the Window Restore Properties dialog box 3 Select the windows you want to have opened when a new layout is loaded Windows that are not selected will not load until specified with the view command or by selecting View gt lt window gt ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 295 GUI Customization Customizing the Simulator GUI Layout You can also work with window layouts by specifying layout suppresstype lt window gt layout restoretype or layout showsuppresstypes Refer to the layout command for more information Configuring the Column Layout Some windows allow you to configure the column layout using the Configure Column Layout dialog Configure Column Layout Dialog Figure 6 1 Configure Column Layout Dialog Configure Column Layout x Layouts All Columns al Create Edit Remove Copy Rename Restore All Defaults ha Apply KJ H denotes user created or modified layouts This dialog can also be opened by right clicking a column heading and selecting Configure Column Layout from the popup menu or by selecting Configure Col
59. eee eee eee 245 Table 4 56 Verification Browser Icons 0 0 0 eee eee eens 259 Table 4 57 Verification Management Browser Window Column Descriptions 261 Table 4 58 Verification Browser View Menu 00 cee eee eee ee eens 262 Table 4 59 Verification Management Browser Window Popup Menu 265 Table 4 60 Watch Window Popup Menu 0 cc eee eee eee eens 269 Table 4 61 Watch Window Menu 0 0c ccc eee eee eee ees 270 Table 4 62 Analog Sidebar Icons 0 ee nee eens 276 Table 4 63 Window Icons 0 0 ccc cc eee eee eee eens 278 Table S L MOUSCe SNONCHIS taccaesccteteremeteeanesane tease eee ee se ne eee ees 285 Table 5 2 Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 0 eee nee eens 286 Table 5 3 List Window Keyboard Shortcuts 20 0 ccc eee eee 289 Table 5 4 Wave Window Mouse Shortcuts 0 cc eee ees 289 Table 5 5 Wave Window Keyboard Shortcuts 0 ccc eee eee 290 Table bloa PONS 4sc5250268e5 005oeeeenene EE ERNE EEE EESE Basta genau 307 Table 7 2 Default ListTranslateTable Values 0 0 0 ee eee 310 Table 7 3 Default LogicStyleTable Values 0 0 000 ccc ee eee 311 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 15 16 List of Tables ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Chapter 1 Overview The ModelSim graphical user interface GUI provides access to numerous debugging tools and windows that enable
60. entire design by doing any one of the following e Select Process gt In Region Design Active or Hierarchy e Use the Process Toolbar Right click in the Process window and select In Region Design Active or Hierarchy ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 196 Window Reference Processes Window The view mode you select is persistent and is remembered when you exit the simulation The next time you bring up the tool this window will initialize in the last view mode used Filtering Processes You can control which processes are visible in the Processes window as follows 1 Right click in the Processes window and select Display Options 2 Inthe Process Display Options dialog box select the Type or States you want to include or exclude from the window 3 OK When you filter the window according to specific process states the heading of the State column changes to State filtered as shown in Figure 4 52 Figure 4 52 Column Heading Changes When States are Filtered Process Design Hi7 Flame Type filtered state filtered Parent Path O FALWAYS SS Always Ready 3 itopim g FALWAYS 1I5S Always Ready 2l Next Active fkopyc The default No Implicit amp Primitive selection causes the Process window to display all process types except implicit and primitive types When you filter the display according to specific process types the heading of the Type column becomes Type filtered
61. in Figure 4 77 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 231 Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 77 Modifying Existing Breakpoints Modify Breakpoints Disable Delete Load Save File Breakpoint E X Break Point Label peor E on ie 3 Breakpoint Label File tine _ SS 7 File counter i counter Browse Condition aaa S gt Line Instance Mame 36 Command a a e CI Breakpoint Commands OK Cancel The Modify Breakpoints dialog box provides a list of all breakpoints in the design To modify a breakpoint do the following 1 Select a file line breakpoint from the list 2 Click Modify which opens the File Breakpoint dialog box shown in Figure 4 77 3 Fill out any of the following fields to modify the selected breakpoint Breakpoint Label Designates a label for the breakpoint 232 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Instance Name The full pathname to an instance that sets an HDL or SystemC breakpoint so it applies only to that specified instance Breakpoint Condition One or more conditions that determine whether the breakpoint is observed If the condition is true the simulation stops at the breakpoint If false the simulation bypasses the breakpoint A condition cannot refer to a VHDL variable only a signal Refer to the tip below for more information on proper syntax for breakpoints entered in
62. mentor com eula IMPORTANT INFORMATION USE OF ALL SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCTS USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES CUSTOMER S COMPLETE AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Agreement This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software as defined in Section 2 and hardware collectively Products between the company acquiring the Products Customer and the Mentor Graphics entity that issued the corresponding quotation or if no quotation was issued the applicable local Mentor Graphics entity Mentor Graphics Except for license agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by Customer and an authorized representative of Mentor Graphics this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties entire understanding relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements If Customer does not agree to these terms and conditions promptly return or in the case of Software received electronically certify destruction of Software and all accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid ORDERS FEES AND PAYMENT 1 1 To the extent Cu
63. on the selected signal finds the next edge Shift Tab search backward left to the previous transition on the selected signal finds the previous edge Ctrl G automatically create a group for the selected signals by region with the name Group lt n gt If you use this shortcut on signals for which there is already a Group lt n gt they will be placed in that region s group rather than creating a new one Ctrl F Windows open the find dialog box searches within the specified field in Ctrl S UNIX the pathname pane for text strings Ctrl Left Arrow scroll pathname values or waveform pane left or right by a Ctrl Right Arrow page ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 291 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions Wave Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts 292 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Chapter 6 GUI Customization The ModelSim GUI is programmed using Tcl Tk It is highly customizable You can control everything from window size position and color to the text of window prompts default output filenames and so forth You can even add buttons and menus that run user programmable Tcl code Most user GUI preferences are stored as Tcl variables in the modelsim file on Unix Linux platforms or the Registry on Windows platforms The variable values save automatically when you exit ModelSim Some of the variables are modified by actions you take with menus or windows for example resizing a window ch
64. ore cgcceeeenete ener deed eneeasee ener LEET A 35 Figure 1 18 Wave Window Panes 0 0 eee eee eee eens 36 Figure 1 19 Main Window Status Bar 0 0 nee ees 36 Figure 1 20 Current Time Label 20 00 nee eens 39 Figure 1 21 Enter Current Time Value 0 0 ccc eee eens 40 Fiure 5 1 ATV Tool Dar eee aa a tere a S E E G Deere ene Sees 53 Figure 3 2 Analysis Toolbar 0 0 anane 54 Figure 3 3 Bookmarks Toolbar 2 2 20 0 0 een nee eens 54 Figure 3 4 Column Layout Toolbar 20 0 0 eens 55 Figure 5 5 Compile TL0olDat 6 044041 04044 006860440440 54446 0 TSH SS CREO SESS OREM 56 Proure 5 O 700 Velde OOIDAN ic owt dry ese ut aang se A E Be gh eee sa E a eG ees 57 Figure 3 7 Dataflow Toolbar 2 0 000 eee nee ees 58 Fiure S FPSM LOOIbals cocenp toad eure bute ater Coed eure buteaeer eee eure eu ees 59 Piomre 5 Help Tool Dai sc 4 4 phe eases E E aes ne bans we T enone 60 Figure 3 10 Layout Toolbar 1 0 ce enn a A 61 Figure 3 11 Memory Toolbar 2 2 0 een nee ees 61 Figure 3 12 Mode Toolbar 0 0 0 0c ee enn ees 62 Figure 5 15 ObDjecihilter LOOWWdl s4cccceaee oon scenes saedue ona peer eeesaeane a 62 Figure 3 14 Precision Toolbar 2 2 0 0 0 0 eee nee teens 63 Fieu 5 15 Process Tool Dar seses sate oat nena Sak eee es aes Sa eee ae 64 Figure 3 16 Protile Toolbar 262620545 cece eete eters deeaedeateetads at cenedeas 64 Figure 3 17 Schematic Toolbar
65. procs p procis p l_systf_calltf gf lt NoContext gt Access the Profile Ranked window using either of the following Menu item View gt Profiling gt Ranked Profile e Command view ranked Figure 4 57 Profile Ranked Window wt Ranked Hr FiName Undertraw intraw Undertss Inse l _attach_process 33 3 l _systF_calltF 33 39 proci Bots prac wig 33 oe lt NoCallStack gt 0 0 Access the Profile Structural window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Profiling gt Structural Profile e Command view structural 202 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Figure 4 58 Profile Structural Window at Structural Hr FiMame _ Underfraw Under _ In P g o lt NoContext gt Access the Profile Structural window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Profiling gt Profile Details e Command view profiledetails Figure 4 59 Profile Details Window we Profile Details Hr Callers and callees of l _attach_process Mame Underirawt Inira Undert proci r9 1 T 100 0s _ i_atkach_ process 1 1 100 0 GUI Elements of the Profile Windows This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Profiling Windows 203 Window Reference Profiling Windows Column Descriptions Table 4 51 Profile Calltree Window Column Descriptions Parent lists the ratio as a percentage of th
66. procs are loaded after initialization by assigning them to the PrefMain user_hook preference variable The procs must be saved in a modelsim tcl file located in the install directory for Windows platforms or in the directory from which ModelSim is invoked for other platforms refer to The modelsim tcl File for more information Buttons are added to the Standard toolbar and menus are added to the main menu bar in the GUI The following Tcl example demonstrates two procs that create a menu and two buttons and the syntax for setting the procs with the PrefMain user_hook preference variable Refer to Figure 7 3 308 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Preferences Simulator GUI Preferences Figure 7 3 Persistent Buttons and Menus File Edit View Compile Simulate Add Library Tools Layout Bookmarks Window UsrMenu Help proc AddMyMenus wname global myglobalvar set cmd1 echo my_own_thing Swname set cmd2 echo my_to_upper Swname set cmd3 echo my_to_lower Swname WinName Menu Menultem label Command ee ee add_menu Swname usrMenu add_menuitem Swname usrMenu Do My Own Thing cmd1 add_separator Swname usrMenu add_submenu Swname usrMenu changeCase add_menuitem Swname usrMenu changeCase To Upper Scmd2 add_menuitem Swname usrMenu changeCase To Lower Scmd3 add_submenu Swname usrMenu vars add_menucb Swname usrMenu vars Feature One variable myglobalvar onvalue 1 offv
67. refer to the same object will point to the same Watch window box even if the name used to reach the object is different This means circular references will be draw as circular 268 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Watch Window Popup Menu Table 4 60 Watch Window Popup Menu Popup menu Tem Add Add the selected item or items to the desired window Opens the Force Selected Signal dialog box which allows you to force the signal to given value Refer to the force command for details about the options NoForce Removes the force on the selected object Refer to the noforce command Clock Performs actions related to the force command with the repeat argument Change Performs actions related to the change command Follow Selection Context Changes the current context in the Structure window Save Format Saves a new or loads an existing do file Load Format containing add watch commands to recreate the Watch window Group Groups several selected signals into a single item UnGroup Breaks a previously created group back into its individual signals Properties Opens the Properties dialog box which allows you to alter the properties of the selected signal or group including Header name e Radix type This option is not available when multiple signals are selected Delete Item Removes the selected signal from the window You can alternatively use the delete key Clear All Removes all s
68. restored for window Source Saving and Reloading Formats and Content You can use the write format restart command to create a single do file that will recreate all debug windows and breakpoints see Saving and Restoring Breakpoints when invoked with the do command in subsequent simulation runs The syntax is write format restart lt filename gt If the ShutdownFile modelsim ini variable is set to this do filename it will call the write format restart command upon exit Scribble Mode On Linux systems you can capture an image of the desktop or a single window make line drawings and take notes then save the image for later review or to share with others Scribble mode provides a quick way to make annotions directly on the GUI Figure 1 7 Scribble Mode CEF T FAT IFEI OS O BE F ee MP ww owt HMMA E fi FT au Qe o Gl le E EEEE Bee Es search EEFE eee Obje ae ee Dataflow Delit haare Name value kin 2599 no fb ii Lh Register LT Hei B Lhe Fel reo L hy Hei peri Lhe Hel Lit Hel Lhd Hel ii Lhz Hiei m i Landdds Pack i Lhd Nel Taga Mhkaradi JAL WATST FAL WAT Sad pAS Sera bi fog h t RASSIGNMZZ F Incorrect Value Here Fel Wa S335 FALWATSaTs a PASSAZ 265 Sho hea BAL WAY Sa LoS a ell Transcript E Greek in Hegule proce at pm aki dataflow ain top pilata E Wind 17 M eUn Deka l 24 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview Gener
69. search Wave Compare Toolbar The Wave Compare toolbar allows you to quickly find differences in a waveform comparison Figure 3 25 Wave Compare Toolbar a fe e 2 oH Table 3 23 Wave Compare Toolbar Buttons Find First None Find the first difference in a Difference waveform comparison Find Find the previous annotated Previous difference in a waveform Annotated comparison Difference Difference Find Next None Find the next difference in a i Difference waveform comparison Find Next Find the next annotated A Annotated difference in a waveform Difference comparison l Find the previous difference in e Previous a waveform comparison 76 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Wave Cursor Toolbar Table 3 23 Wave Compare Toolbar Buttons cont Find Last None Find the last difference in a ad Difference waveform comparison Wave Cursor Toolbar The Wave Cursor toolbar provides various tools for manipulating cursors in the Wave window Figure 3 26 Wave Cursor Toolbar eeere re s Table 3 24 Wave Cursor Toolbar Buttons Insert Cursor None Adds a new cursor to the active tt Wave window Delete Menu Wave gt Deletes the active cursor Lt Cursor Delete Cursor Find Menu Edit gt Signal Search Moves the active cursor to the Previous Hotkey Shift Tab previous signal value change Transition for the selected signal Find Next Menu Edit gt Signal Search Moves the active cu
70. separately 172 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Memory Data Window Use this window to view the contents of a memory Accessing Access the window by e Double clicking on a memory in the Memory List window Figure 4 42 Memory Data Window E Memory Data ftopic sO atag_mem OOOO0000 QOOOOO0008 OOOO0010 OOOOO0LS Address Pane Memory Data Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Memory Data window Direct Address Navigation You can navigate to any address location directly by editing the address in the address column Double click on any address type in the desired address and hit Enter The address display scrolls to the specified location Splitting the Memory Contents Window To split a memory contents window into two screens displaying the contents of a single memory instance select Memory Data gt Split Screen ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 173 Window Reference Memory Data Window This allows you to view different address locations within the same memory instance simultaneously Figure 4 43 Split Screen View of Memory Contents noooooo0 nooo0oo0s OoOooogooc NOOOUOLE OoOoogoo1S NOOOUOle nooogodoz4 dadda minininin iniajn NOOOOOOE OoOogogogooe addd lz nooooo1S OOoOoUOle nooo0o0e4 ooogogounza OO0101000 00101110 00110100 00111010 ld O1LO00110 01001100 01010010 00101000 00101110 00110100 00111010 oO1000000 01000110 01001100 01010010 OO1
71. several commands for controlling coverage data display in a Source window Hide Show coverage data toggles the Hits column off and on Hide Show branch coverage toggles the BC column off and on Hide Show coverage numbers displays the number of executions in the Hits and BC columns rather than check marks and Xs When multiple statements occur on a single line an ellipsis replaces the Hits number In such cases hover the cursor over each statement to highlight it and display the number of executions for that statement Show coverage By Instance displays only the number of executions for the currently selected instance in the Main window workspace Debugging with Source Annotation With source annotation you can interactively debug your design by analyzing your source files in addition to using the Wave and Signal windows Source annotation displays simulation values including transitions for each signal in your source file Figure 4 69 shows an example of source annotation where the red values are added below the signals ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 223 Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 69 Source Annotation Example Fe C examples tutorials verilog dataflow proc v top p Default int Se 1 Driver 4 gt 21 reg verbose 1 22 wire t out t set rw out StX StX StX wire addr size 1 0 5 ddr addr r 000 00001001 wire word size 1 0 5 data data r 000
72. shown in reports created with the vcover report command Only enabled if the simulator is invoked with the assertdebug option or the ini file variable AssertionDebug is set to 1 Peak Memory The peak memory used by the assertion Peak Memory Time Indicates the simulation run time at which the peak memory usage occurred Proof Radius Indicates that the property has been verified to a depth of x number of cycles in the formal analysis Shown as positive integer Data appears in this column only during post process analysis Coverage View mode Vacuous Count The number of assertion attempts that have succeeded vacuously that is if the left hand side of an implication is false on a clock edge This column is populated when you specify assertcover or assertdebug for vsim or if either the AssertionCover or AssertionDebug ini file variable is set to 1 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 89 Window Reference Assertions Window Popup Menu Right click in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 3 Assertions Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem specified window Configure Allows you to configure the simulators behavior for the selected assertion Enable Enables checking of the assertion for failures during the simulation Failure Log Logs failure messages PSL only to the transcript Logs pass messages PSL only to the transcript Only enabled if
73. tax Customer will make all payments free and clear of and without reduction for any withholding or other taxes any such taxes imposed on payments by Customer hereunder will be Customer s sole responsibility If Customer appoints a third party to place purchase orders and or make payments on Customer s behalf Customer shall be liable for payment under Orders placed by such third party in the event of default 1 3 All Products are delivered FCA factory Incoterms 2010 freight prepaid and invoiced to Customer except Software delivered electronically which shall be deemed delivered when made available to Customer for download Mentor Graphics retains a security interest in all Products delivered under this Agreement to secure payment of the purchase price of such Products and Customer agrees to sign any documents that Mentor Graphics determines to be necessary or convenient for use in filing or perfecting such security interest Mentor Graphics delivery of Software by electronic means is subject to Customer s provision of both a primary and an alternate e mail address GRANT OF LICENSE The software installed downloaded or otherwise acquired by Customer under this Agreement including any updates modifications revisions copies documentation and design data Software are copyrighted trade secret and confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights no
74. the GUI Breakpoint Command A string enclosed in braces that specifies one or more commands to be executed at the breakpoint Use a semicolon to separate multiple commands Tip All fields in the File Breakpoint dialog box except the Breakpoint Condition field use the same syntax and format as the inst switch and the command string of the bp command Do not enclose the expression entered in the Breakpoint Condition field in quotation marks For more information on these command options refer to the bp command in the Questa SV AFV Reference Manual 4 Click OK to close the File Breakpoints dialog box 5 Click OK to close the Modify Breakpoints dialog box Loading and Saving Breakpoints The Modify Breakpoints dialog Figure 4 77 includes Load and Save buttons that allow you to load or save breakpoints Setting Conditional Breakpoints In dynamic class based code an expression can be executed by more than one object or class instance during the simulation of a design You set a conditional breakpoint on the line in the source file that defines the expression and specifies a condition of the expression or instance you want to examine You can write conditional breakpoints to evaluate an absolute expression or a relative expression You can use the SystemVerilog keyword this when writing conditional breakpoints to refer to properties parameters or methods of an instance The value of this changes every time th
75. the Now time which is the end of simulation time When you select a cursor in the Wave windowor in the Wave viewer of the Schematic or Dataflow window the Current Time Label automatically changes to display the time of the current active cursor and updates the other windows to the same time The Current Time Label includes a minimize maximize button that allows you to hide or display the label When you select an object in a window displaying the Current Time label you can jump to the previous or next transition for that object with respect to the current time by clicking the Find Previous or Find Next button To change the display from showing the Current Time to showing the Now time default or vice versa click on the time display in the Current Time label to open a drop down menu Figure 1 21 or select View gt Time Mode ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 39 Overview General Visual Elements Figure 1 21 Enter Current Time Value Te 2025 ns Hh E Now 2 820 ns w Current Time 2025 ns Enter Value X Change Current Time to ea 1 Uz3 Ha Set Current Time 40 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Chapter 2 Menus The main window menu bar is dynamic based on which window is selected resulting in some menu items changing name or becoming unavailable greyed out This section describes the menu items at the highest possible level Window specific Menu Every window h
76. the Structure window simply click the Top Category heading of the column to open a new Change Structure Preference Value dialog Figure 4 85 250 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Structure Window Figure 4 85 Change Default Ordering of Structure Window Change Structure Preference Value New value for PrefStructure topCategoryOrder Top Level Category Order Categories Top level category display order This determines the viewing order of top level items in the Structure window Cancel To change the default ordering of the top level categories simply select a category then use the up or down arrowheads to move the selection Code Coverage in the Structure Window The Structure window displays code coverage information in the Structure sim window for any datasets being simulated When coverage is invoked several columns for displaying coverage data are added to these windows You can toggle columns on off by right clicking on a column name and selecting from the context menu that appears Figure 4 86 shows a portion of the Structure window with code coverage data displayed Figure 4 86 Code Coverage Data in the Structure Window tmt misses ottrit 3 Stmt graph Branch count Branch hits Branch misses Branch Jo Branch gr 4 69 5 D 34 30 4 55 2 E 1 533 E 10 3 1 10 E E Memories ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 251 Window Reference S
77. the top or the end of the Pathnames Pane e Command add wave When you drag and drop objects into the Wave window the add wave command is reflected in the Transcript window Refer to Adding Objects to the Wave Window for more information about adding objects to the Wave window Wave Window Panes The Wave window is divided into a number of window panes All window panes in the Wave window can be resized by clicking and dragging the bar between any two panes Pathname Pane The pathname pane displays signal pathnames Signals can be displayed with full pathnames as shown here or with any number of path elements You can increase the size of the pane by clicking and dragging on the right border The selected signal is highlighted The white bar along the left margin indicates the selected Wave window or pane of a split wave window see Splitting Wave Window Panes Insertion Point Bar You can select the location for inserting signals by placing the cursor over the left white bar in the Pathnames Pane The white arrow and green bar indicate the selected location for the insertion pointer Clicking the left mouse button sets the new insertion pointer 2 2 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Wave Window Figure 4 95 Pathnames Pane dout fifo_rd 4 dval f dk rst enable din 4 dnow ddly chit shifted delta j present_state next state end enil e ne j en Va
78. through the tasks necessary to add a VHDL Design Unit or Verilog Module or System SC MODULE to your code Design Unit Please enter the name you First You need to enter the name you want for the design unit and want to use for this design then the wizard will allow you to enter each of the ping on the block you want to create Design Unit Name lt Previous Het gt Cancel Highlighted Code in Language Templates Code inserted into your source contains a variety of highlighted fields The example below shows a module statement inserted from the Verilog template 228 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 75 Language Template Context Menus hi Ciquestasin_6 6xfexamples tutorialsisystemyverilag vlag_dut Untitled 1 s Bn fh Es Language Templates unt Met Design Wizard 1 7 X Create Testhench 2 module module name MEMA li 3 wee 4 module iter 5 6 5 7 Language Constructs Primitive TEA Interface Fackage Program D Declarations TERE 5 Statements gate instantiation input gate GT Instantiations generated_instantiation n output_gate Compiler Directives Blocks t enable_gate Blocks module declaration pullup 5 System Tasks and Func program declaration pulldown Atimulus Generators E module item declaration module instantiation mos switch pass switch x pass enable switch ee
79. v10 2c 206 Window Reference Schematic Window For example if you have a Verilog design with a top level module named top v you would do the following vlib work vlog v vopt acc top o top_opt debugdb vsim debugdb top_opt log r Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Schematic or Add gt To Schematic The Add gt To Schematic menu options change dynamically based on which debug window is currently active Command view schematic or add schematic incr full lt design_unit_name gt If incr or full is not provided with the add schematic command the design unit will be added to the currently active Schematic view mode Figure 4 61 Schematic Window fe Schematic Default oH 8g View Incrementa Le E Mow FY p Schematic Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Schematic window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 207 Window Reference Schematic Window Adding Objects to the Incremental View You can use any of the following methods to add objects to the Incremental View of the Schematic window e Drag and drop objects from other windows Both nets and instances may be dragged and dropped Dragging an instance will result in the addition of all nets connected to that instance When an object is dragged and dropped into the Incremental view the add schematic command will be reflected in the Transcript window Use the A
80. window 2 Click the Search For button and select the column to filter on 3 Enter a string in the Find text box 4 Enter Refer to the section Find and Filter Functions for more information Filtering Contents of the Objects Window You can filter the contents of the Objects window by the Name column 1 Ctrl F to display the Find box at the bottom of the window 2 Ctrl M to change to Contains mode 3 Enter a string in the Contains text box The filtering will occur as you begin typing You can disable this feature with Ctrl T Filters are stored relative to the region selected in the Structure window If you re select a region that had a filter applied that filter is restored This allows you to apply different filters to different regions Refer to the section Find and Filter Functions for more information Filtering by Signal Type The View gt Filter menu selection allows you to specify which signal types to display in the Objects window Multiple options can be selected Select Change Filter to open the Filter Objects dialog where you can select port modes and object types to be displayed Popup Menu Right click anywhere in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 48 Objects Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem View Declaration Opens a Source window to the declaration of the object Add Wave Adds the selected object s to the Wave window Add Wav
81. window so that the base or extended default classes are at the top of the hierarchy ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 105 Code Coverage Analysis Window Use this window to view covered executed uncovered missed and or excluded statements branches conditions expressions FSM states and transitions as well as signals that have and have not toggled The Code Coverage Analysis window replaces all functionality previously found in the Missing lt coverage type gt and Current Exclusions windows Prerequisites This window is specific to the collection of coverage metrics therefore you must have run your simulation with coverage collection enabled Refer to the Code Coverage chapter for more information Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Coverage gt Code Coverage Analysis Then select the desired analysis type from the Code Coverage Analysis window s title bar detailed in Table 4 15 Command view canalysis Figure 4 8 Code Coverage Analysis Code Coverage Analysis otatements by instance test_smmi h test sm w thy 24 5 into 4 b0000 28 h0 op word 31 5 into 4 b0001 28 b0 ctrl word 32 posedge clk 33 5 into data 41 5 into 4 bHOOL10 26 HO op word 42 posedge clk 45 5 into addr i dd posedge clk Fre 45 5 into data h test sm by file Analysis GUI Elements of the Code
82. you stop it Continue continue the simulation Run Next run to the next event time Step single step the simulator Step Over execute without single stepping through a subprogram call Restart reload the design elements and reset the simulation time to zero only design elements that have changed are reloaded you specify whether to maintain various objects logged signals breakpoints etc Stop the current simulation run End Simulation Quit the current simulation run 46 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Menus Add Menu Add Menu Table 2 6 Add Menu Item Description Add information to the Schematic window Add information to the Dataflow window Window Pane Add an additional pane to the Wave window You can remove this pane by selecting Wave gt Delete Window Pane Tools Menu Table 2 7 Tools Menu Item Description Waveform Compare Access tasks for waveform comparison Refer to the section Waveform Compare for more information Code Coverage Access tasks for code coverage Refer to the chapter Code Coverage Analysis Window for more information Functional Coverage Access menus for configuring cover directives and filtering functional coverage items See Functional Coverage Control Options and Filtering Functional Coverage Data for more information Toggle Coverage Add toggle coverage tracking Refer to the section Toggle Coverage for more information
83. you to analyze different parts of your design All windows initially display within the ModelSim Main window Figure 1 1 Graphical User Interface Pile Ect View Comoe Smua Add Wave Took Layout Window Help mE Fa keer er esl alfa 4s adio Megs St itopipirdy Sto jtoplpfaddr 00001001 topipi tl en Ee ftepipfdata 00000000 itopipiadd y OOOOL00L a PASSIGMEZI procis po OKAT DEII me itopipidata r rrrrrzrrrr H PASSIGNED procifast 4 fropipyw si ASSIGHEZS procifast arb ftopypistrb_r a PASSA proofs werboss ioofniverbese C NOT 29 procifast opip o a FORMS procie RopipA set L NADAO procifast 4 n ET L snm procifet fiis itopipitet W AFFA procit fhogalpebek W cache fast itopipi rw ET a m a memeni fash focipftest_in fines pa Feet f i fiona FALWAYS 29 bogelfiast Ge E E aevein_capascihyat Tal Reading Eroa eddr 0 f 2760 Fead hit t see F Read Vrite test done f tt Vote qatop proc 94 F Time 2820 n Iteration 1 Instance topsp f Break in Module proce sf proc line 94 Fi a gt hace ote ie Deta 1 een hhopia eae Pee he PR ee F General GUI Tasks This section describes tasks common to more than one individual window and is organized into the following categories ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 17 Overview General GUI Tasks e Window Management e Column Based Windows Bookmarks e Scribble Mode
84. 0 15625 93746 10 11 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Covergroups Window The Covergroups window displays SystemVerilog covergroups coverpoints crosses and bins in the current region which is selected via the Structure window Refer to the section Viewing Functional Coverage Statistics in the GUI for more information Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Coverage gt Covergroups e Command view covergroups Figure 4 14 Covergroups Window Covergroups shal top dut fifo TYPE ram_cvg 100 0 100 100 0 E 3 sh top dut i gf TYPE sm_transitions_cvg 100 0 100 100 0 M 7 gf COVP sm_transitions_cvg int_state 100 0 100 100 0 i 4 j TYPE sm_cvg 76 9 100 76 9 B j g OVP sm_cvgiint_state 92 3 100 92 3 Pe 3 gf CVP sm_cvgiin_hs 100 0 ioo 100 0 D B bin valid 17543 500 100 0 P gf CVP sm_cvg out_hs 100 0 100 100 0 Pi CROSS sm_cvg in_hsXint_state 46 1 100 1 ZZ gf CROSS sm_cvg out_hsxXint_state 46 1 100 46 1 E f H finterleaver_svc_pkg interleaver_cover interleaver i a ge r a e th an a i a ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 119 Window Reference Covergroups Window GUI Elements of the Covergroups Window Column Descriptions Table 4 18 Covergroups Window Columns Auto_bin_max the maximum number of automatically created bins when no bins are explicitly defined for coverpoints
85. 00 0 oo000000 Pr 11000 1 oooo00000 Lg IL B2 Daada oO A 11000 515000 0 40000000 820000 0 40000000 S2439000 1 40000000 HOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOoOOOOOOD ie OOP RRP rPOrRER FE oO oOo oO 164 lines 4 Use this window to display a textual representation of waveforms which you can configure to show events and delta events for the signals or objects you have added to the window You can view the following object types in the List window e VHDL signals aliases process variables and shared variables e Verilog nets registers and variables e SystemC primitive channels ports and transactions e Comparisons comparison objects see Waveform Compare for more information e Virtuals virtual signals and functions e SystemVerilog and PSL assertions assert directives ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 150 Window Reference List Window e SystemVerilog and PSL cover directives cover directives e Questa Verification IP objects see Questa Verification IP Objects in the GUI e 6SystemVerilog transactions Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt List e Command view list Figure 4 25 List Window na top clk ftop paddr ftop pdata top saddr E delta t Copr pris top srw top patrhy ftop sstrb y top pray top s
86. 01001 00101111 00110101 OO111011 oO1l000001 OLOOOLI1 01001101 O1O10011 oOO0101001 OOLO1111 00110101 00111011 oO1000001 O1LOO00111 01001101 01010011 ONO101L010 00110000 00110110 00111100 O1000010 O1LOOLOOO 01001110 O1O10100 00101010 ONOLLOOOO 00110110 OO111100 O1000010 llad 01001110 01010100 OOLOLO1L 00110001 OO110111 00111101 O1000011 O1LOOLOOL O1001111 01010101 OO101011 OOLLOOOL OO110111 00111101 O1000011 O1O0L001 O1001111 O1010101 OOLOLLOO 00110010 OO111000 00111110 O1000100 O1OOL010 O101L0000 01010110 ONO101100 ONOLLOO1O OO111000 00111110 01000100 O1001010 O1010000 01010110 OOLOLLOL 00110011 OO111001 00111111 O1000101 O1OOLO11 O101L0001 01010111 OO101101 OOLLOO1L OO111001 OOLLL111 01000101 O100L1011 O1010001 01010111 GUI Elements of the Memory Data Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Popup Menu Right click in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 38 Memory Data Popup Menu Address Pane Popup Menu Ten Allows you to go to a specific address Split Screen Splits the Memory Data window to allow you to view different parts of the memory simultaneously Properties Allows you to set various properties for the Memory Data window Closes the active Memory Data window Close All Closes all Memory Data windows 174 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Wind
87. 3 31 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 81 Toolbars Tabbed Toolbars 82 Figure 3 31 Window Specific Buttons Objects addr sirb data addr_r data_r rw T strb_r verbose t out t set rw_out d F F hi iho s ha hi hi 16 hooo09 shod l hzzzz hi hi hi hx hx hx os os E a a f 5 rF m mm ma O mm fo mn en ee i io 7 z r rF P i m im mt m ack Regis JAA g Mm HE i a a oo a ro a a at at ro at om om om om ee oe a ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Chapter 4 Window Reference The following table summarizes all of the available windows Table 4 1 GUI Windows ATV Window displays a graphical time based view of your SystemVerilog and PSL assertions manages SystemVerilog and PSL assertions Call Stack Window displays the current call stack allowing you to debug your design by analyzing the depth of function calls Capacity Window displays capacity data memory usage about System Verilog constructs Class Graph Window displays interactive relationships of SystemVerilog classes in graphical form Class Instances Window displays class instances Class Tree Window displays interactive relationships of System Verilog classes in tabular form Code Coverage Analysis displays missing code coverage details and code Window coverage exclusions Cover Directives Window manages SystemVerilog an
88. 55 Column layout configure 56 296 create 297 313 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY2Z edit 296 Combine Selected Signals dialog box 152 Combine signals 162 Command completion 257 compare 162 Compare signal virtual 162 Conditional breakpoints 233 use of SystemVerilog keyword this 233 conditional breakpoints use of keyword this 233 Configure column layout 56 296 Contains 25 28 29 Cover directives coverage percentage 11 display options 112 recursive display mode 113 show all contexts display mode 113 Cover Directives tab column descriptions 111 Cover Directives window 111 Coverage directive Analysis pane 111 Coverage Details window 106 114 Coverage numbers mismatching 222 Covergroups window 119 column descriptions 120 Create column layout 297 Creating do file 24 162 Cursor linking 276 Custom column layout 297 Customize columns 56 296 Customize GUI fonts 306 customizing via preference variables 305 Dashed signal lines 275 Dataflow window 124 lt Italic gt see also windows Dataflow window Deltas in List window 164 314 descriptions of HDL items 235 Design object icons described 37 Directive coverage 111 Display mode recursive 113 show all contexts 113 Display options cover directives 112 DO files macros creating from a saved transcript 254 E Edit breakpoints 231 column layout 296 Editing in notepad windows 285 in the Main w
89. Agreement ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 7 List of Examples Example 6 1 Using the radix define Command 0 0 300 Example 6 2 Using radix define to Specify Color 20 0 0 2 2 2 eee 301 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 List of Figures Graphical User Interface 0 eee ETER 17 Window Header Handle 0 0 eens 19 MEA EAI NG eeren OG Bese ed aoe a we es ae A eS Soe A et ae eee ae a 19 Window Undock Button 0 0 aaeanoa 20 Manage Bookmarks Dialog Box 0 0 ccc es 22 Bookmark Options Dialog BOX 0 0 0 ee nnn ees 23 SOODE MOIO en to a ee ere ee ee 24 Figure cM IN ODS ca sec okt spe wine Geshe se ide chet pe wine Geshe ide Beech dpe aime Ges aeo eide Gd 29 Figure 1 9 Filter Mode x 4 ccnccvcne epee eens eee see obeoensadateedee eeaw anne e 26 Figure 1 10 Find Mode Popup Displaying Matches 0 0 2 0 cee eee eee 28 Figure 1 11 Find Options Popup Menu 2 cece cee eee 30 Figure 1 12 Main Window of the GUI 6 0 eee eee 31 Figure 1 13 Main Window Menu Bar 0 0 ccc ccc eee eens a2 Figure 1 14 Main Window Toolbar Frame 20 0 eens 32 Figure 1 15 Main Window Toolbar 0 0 0 0 eee eens 33 Figure 1 16 GUI Windows 1 0 aneneen renner eee 34 Picure 1 17 GUF tab Group
90. Assertions and Cover Directives in the Wave Window e SystemVerilog and PSL cover directives indicated by a light blue SVA or magenta PSL chevron see Viewing Assertions and Cover Directives in the Wave Window e Questa Verification IP objects see Questa Verification IP Objects in the GUI see Questa Verification IP Transaction Viewing in the GUI for more information e Created waveforms indicated by a red dot on a diamond see Generating Stimulus with Waveform Editor The data in the object values pane is very similar to the Objects window except that the values change dynamically whenever a cursor in the waveform pane is moved At the bottom of the waveform pane you can see a time line tick marks and the time value of each cursor s position As you click and drag to move a cursor the time value at the cursor location is updated at the bottom of the cursor You can resize the window panes by clicking on the bar between them and dragging the bar to a new location Waveform and signal name formatting are easily changed via the Format menu You can reuse any formatting changes you make by saving a Wave window format file see Saving the Window Format Wave Window Toolbar The Wave window in the undocked Wave window gives you quick access to the following toolbars Standard Toolbar e Compile Toolbar ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 279 Window Reference Wave Window 280 Simulate Toolbar Ste
91. Bees ead OnGs Cee OG seas OES Gee OE 148 GUI Elements of the Library Window 0 0 ccc eens 148 WGIST WAINGOW oc 2 da646 secre eae AEAEE EAEEREN e gases 150 List Window Mask S235 pa oe baie oe Ae e ESAS oe Awe ee ead woe raio taa 151 GUI Elements of the List Window 0 0 cc ee een ees 167 Locals Window 4 444 4424405e hed Pea GARSEE A Rhee Ee ADEE EE Eee RERNE 170 L cals Window TASKS c2eeeerereeeetat ceeeta ne eeeeta te ea peta beans gatas a 170 GUI Elements of the Locals Window 0 0 ccc eee nnn ees 171 Memory Data Window 2124202604 t ono ie aden eeea eens bane eee eee eee eee 173 Memory Data Window Tasks 0 0 0 0 0 eee ene ee eens 173 GUI Elements of the Memory Data Window 0 0c ce ees 174 Memory List Window 0 ccc eee eee ee eee e eens 176 Memory List Window Tasks 0 0 eee eee e eens 178 GUI Elements of the Memory List Window 0 0 0 ccc cece eens 179 Message Viewer WINdOW 2 s 64 6s0cesneesueagaddeteusadedweneadecierandecors 182 Message Viewer Window Tasks 00 ccc cee een eens 183 GUI Elements of the Message Viewer Window 0 0 00 eens 184 ADEE WINGOW e ot rato oe ee ee de eo ee an oo ane Bo SS Sh oe ae dee oe oes 190 Objects Window TaskKSi ce 2 s20eted s dado ahd dadetetetadehets dadetetaged ands 191 GUI Elements of the Objects Window 0 0 nanenane 194 Processes Window ises enssrui ser ANAE EA EAEN E A O AEE EA 196 Processes W
92. CTION 11 IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 8 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS AND CUSTOMER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR DEFENSE SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT TERMINATION AND EFFECT OF TERMINATION 12 1 If a Software license was provided for limited term use such license will automatically terminate at the end of the authorized term Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and or any license granted under this Agreement immediately upon written notice if Customer a exceeds the scope of the license or otherwise fails to comply with the licensing or confidentiality provisions of this Agreement or b becomes insolvent files a bankruptcy petition institutes proceedings for liquidation or winding up or enters into an agreement to assign its assets for the benefit of creditors For any other material breach of any provision of this Agreement Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and or any license granted under this Agreement upon 30 days written notice if Customer fails to cure the breach within the 30 day notice period Termination of this Agreement or any license granted hereunder will not affect Customer s obligation to pay for Products shipped or licenses granted prior to the termination which amounts shall be payable immediately upon the date of termination
93. Coverage Analysis Window This section describes the GUI elements specific to the Code Coverage Analysis window Primary of these are found in the title bar ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 106 Window Reference Code Coverage Analysis Window Table 4 15 Contents of Code Coverage Analysis Title Bar Analysis Type button Specifies the type of coverage analysis currently selected in the sub window inside the Code Coverage Analysis window Six selections are available when you click on the type as shown in the image to the left Branch Expression Condition Fish Toggle Covered items button When selected default as shown in image all covered hit items are displayed in the window When not selected all items are filtered from view Missed items button When selected default all missed items not executed are displayed in the window When not selected all missed items are filtered from view Excluded items button When selected default all excluded items are displayed in window When not selected excluded items are filtered from view By default the buttons listed in Table 4 15 are selected active ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 107 Window Reference Code Coverage Analysis Window Popup Menu Items Table 4 16 Code Coverage Analysis Window Popup Menu Test Analysis Executes coverage analyze on the selected item s and prints information to a Test Analysis window F
94. Customer s feedback will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights title and interest in all such property The provisions of this Subsection 4 3 shall survive termination of this Agreement RESTRICTIONS ON USE 5 1 Customer may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use Each copy must include all notices and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics All copies shall remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors Customer shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of Software including copies merged with other software and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon request Customer shall not make Products available in any form to any person other than Customer s employees and on site contractors excluding Mentor Graphics competitors whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of confidentiality Customer shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Products and ensure that any person permitted access does not disclose or use Products except as permitted by this Agreement Customer shall give Mentor Graphics written notice of any unauthorized disclosure or use of the Products as soon as Customer becomes aware of such unauthorized disclosure or use Except as otherwise permitted for purposes of interoperability as
95. Driver Show Cause Show Root Cause Show X Cause ChaseX Show All Possible Drivers View Path Times Trace to Driving Event Start Trace from End Time Start Trace from Begin Time Add Remove Remove All Add All Signals to Wave Add to Wave Add to Schematic Add to Dataflow Add to List Add to Watch ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Schematic Window Table 4 52 Schematic Window Popup Menu cont Popup Menu Ten Drivers Displays all drivers readers fanins fanouts design inputs and hierarchy inputs of the selected net Traces to the immediate driving process of the selected signal at the current time Traces to the first sequential process that drives the selected signal at the current time Traces to the root cause of the selected signal at the current time Traces to the root of an unknown value X Highlights drivers in the Source window and lists possible drivers Highlights any selected objects with color you select Removes highlight color from selected objects Removes all highlight colors from display Adds all signals in schematic to the Wave window Adds selected signal to Wave window Adds selected signal to Current window or New window Adds selected signal to Dataflow window Adds selected signal to List window Adds selected signal to Watch window 213 Window Reference Schematic Window Table 4 52 Schematic Window Popup Menu cont Popup M
96. Generated 254 reset 7 0 a Compiler Directives 26 5 reset 1 27 4 reset 0 Blocks 5 System Tasks and Functions Stimulus Generators C a end initial Smonitor Sstime Clock fa Counter resect cl R Underlined text denotes a hypertext link that jumps to a linked location either in the same file or to another Source window file Display is toggled on and off by the Source Navigation button ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 215 Window Reference Source Window Current Time Label Displays the Current Time or the Now end of simulation time This is the time used to control state values annotated in the window For details see Current Time Label Also you will see various code coverage indicator icons see Coverage Data in the Source Window for details Green check mark denotes statements branches true or expressions in a particular line that have been covered Red X with no subscripts denotes that multiple kinds of coverage on the line are not covered Red X with subscripts denotes a statement branch false or true condition or expression was not covered Green E with no subscripts denotes a line of code to which active coverage exclusions have been applied Every item on line is excluded none are hit Green E with subscripts denotes a line of codes with various degrees of exclusion Opening Source Files You can open source fi
97. Index A Active Processes pane 196 lt Italic gt see also windows Active Processes pane Active window selecting 18 Add bookmark source window 236 Analog sidebar 275 Ascending expressions ATV window 53 Assertion directives report on active 87 Assertion expressions ascending descending 53 Assertions filtering 244 Assertions window 86 column descriptions 86 ATV ascending expressions 53 graphic symbols 93 toolbar 53 54 view grid icon 53 Autofill text entry find 26 Automatic command help 257 B base radix List window 159 Bookmarks clear all in Source window 236 Source window 236 break stop simulation run 57 68 Breakpoints command execution 233 conditional 233 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c use of SystemVerilog keyword this 233 deleting 230 edit 231 in SystemVerilog class methods 233 load 233 save 233 set with GUI 229 Source window viewing in 215 Bubble diagram using the mouse 136 Buttons user defined 297 buttons user defined 308 a Call Stack pane 95 Clear bookmarks source window 236 Click and sprout schematic window incremental view 206 Clock change sampling signals at 166 Clocking block inout display 278 Code Coverage 251 Instance Coverage pane 142 missed coverage 108 Source window data 220 toggle details 117 Color radix example 301 colorization in Source window 237 Colorize Transcript window 2
98. List Window FSM List car Instance States jT rss 4 simifrice_thicalvin TO present_ state we simifrice tb icalvinfT1 present_ state Ww sim frice_ tbfhobbs present_ state Ww sinifrice_ tb hobbs 1O present_ skate simrice_tb hobbsiIl present_state GUI Elements of the FSM List Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 132 Window Reference FSM List Window Column Descriptions Table 4 23 FSM List Window Columns Instance Lists the FSM instances You can reduce the number of path elements in this column by selecting the FSM List gt Options menu item and altering the Number of Path Elements selection box The number of states in the FSM The number of transitions in the FSM Popup Menu Right click on one of the FSMs in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 24 FSM List Window Popup Menu Properties Displays the FSM Properties dialog box containing detailed information about the FSM FSM List Menu This menu becomes available in the Main menu when the FSM List window 1s active Table 4 25 FSM List Menu Popup Menu Tiem View FSM Opens the FSM in the FSM Viewer window Opens the source file for the FSM instance Add to lt window gt Adds FSM information to the specified window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 133 Window Reference FSM List Window Table 4 25 FSM
99. OR INACCURACY OF ITS PRODUCTS MIGHT RESULT IN DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OR RESTRICTION OF LIABILITY WOULD BE VOID OR INEFFECTIVE UNDER APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF MENTOR GRAPHICS PRODUCTS IN OR FOR HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 9 SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT INDEMNIFICATION CUSTOMER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS FROM ANY CLAIMS LOSS COST DAMAGE EXPENSE OR LIABILITY INCLUDING ATTORNEYS FEES ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF MENTOR GRAPHICS PRODUCTS IN OR FOR HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 10 SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT INFRINGEMENT 11 1 Mentor Graphics will defend or settle at its option and expense any action brought against Customer in the United States Canada Japan or member state of the European Union which alleges that any standard generally supported Product acquired by Customer hereunder infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in such jurisdiction Mentor Graphics will pay costs and damages finally awarded against Customer that are attributable to such action Customer understands and agrees that as conditions to Mentor Graphics obligations under this section Customer must a
100. SSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt g 4NCT 29 procfast Process acc lt g 2NOR 49 proc fast Process acc lt g 4NAND450 procfast Process acc lt FINTIALS6 proc fast Process acc lt 8UFIF1 1 proc fast Process acc lt i gc cache fast Module acc lt ee afm memory fast Module acc lt La ALWAYS 29 top fast Process acc lt ed vsim_capacity Capacity tacc lt Oe yl Structure Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Structure window Using the Popup Menu Right click on an object in the Structure window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 54 Structure Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tiem Opens the source file and bookmarks the object Opens the source file and bookmarks the object Add Wave Adds the selected object s to the Wave window Add Wave New Creates a new instance of the Wave window and adds the selected object s to that window 240 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Structure Window Table 4 54 Structure Window Popup Menu cont Popup Menu Hem Add Wave To Opens a drop down list of Wave windows when multiple windows exist Adds the selected object s to the selected Wave window Add Dataflow Adds the selected object s to a Dataflow window Add to Add the
101. STOS NESLE A 151 Figure 4 26 Time Markers in the List Window 00 cece eee eens 152 Figure 4 27 List Window After configure list delta none Option is Used 153 Figure 4 28 List Window After configure list delta collapse Option is Used 154 Figure 4 29 List Window After write list delta all Option is Used 154 Figure 4 30 List Window After write list event Option is Used 155 Figure 4 31 Wave Signal Search Dialog Box 0 0 0 ce eee 156 Figure 4 32 Expression Builder Dialog Box 2 0 0 ccc eens 157 Figure 4 33 Selecting Signals for Expression Builder 0 0 2 0 158 10 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c List of Figures Figure 4 34 Modifying List Window Display Properties 0 000 cee eee 159 Figure 4 35 List Signal Properties Dialog 0 0 0 ccc eens 160 Figure 4 36 Changing the Radix in the List Window 0 0 eee eee eee 161 Figure 4 37 Line Triggering in the List Window 0 0 cece eee eens 163 Figure 4 38 Setting Trigger Properties 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 164 Figure 4 39 Trigger Gating Using Expression Builder 0 0 0000 eee 165 Figure 4 40 Locals Window 1 2 anneer nrnna 170 Figure 4 41 Change Selected Variable Dialog Box 0 0 0 eee 172 Figure 4 42 Memory Data Window 0 eee eens 173 Figure 4 43 Split Screen View of Memory Con
102. Sc_uint sc_signed sc_unsigned 176 Window Reference Memory List Window Table 4 41 Memory Identification cont Scope architecture module sc_module Recognizable process interface in record package compilation unit struct static variables within a task function named block class Array Kind single dimensional any combination of single dimensional e multi dimensional unpacked dynamic and multi dimensional associative arrays real shortreal e float 1 The element can be bit or std_ulogic if the array has dimensionality gt 2 2 These enumerated types must have at least one enumeration literal that is not a character literal The listed width is the number of entries in the enumerated type definition and the depth is the size of the array itself 3 Any combination of unpacked dynamic and associative arrays is considered a memory provided the leaf level of the data structure is a string or an integral type Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Memory List e Command view memory list ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 177 Window Reference Memory List Window Figure 4 44 Memory List Window Memory Plinstenee ____ Range_ Depth wan L w itopicimru_merm v fhopicisOfdaba me w fhopiclsOfatag me gt fhopicisi data _me v fhopicisifakag mnie we fhopiicls2idata me fhopicis fabag mni
103. Show Local Menu ATV gt Show Local Vars Vars Show Design Menu ATV gt Show Design Objects Objects ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c creates horizontal grid lines from the assertion expression through the Thread Viewer pane changes the display of expressions in the Expressions pane from descending order default to ascending order displays annotation of local variables in the Thread Viewer pane displays the Local Variables pane at the bottom of the viewer displays the Design Objects pane at the bottom of the ATV viewer 53 Toolbars Analysis Toolbar Analysis Toolbar The Analysis coverage toolbar allows you to control aspects of the Code Coverage Analysis window Figure 3 2 Analysis Toolbar Type Statement jmalysis a Fi ye E statement Analysis Branch Analysis Expression Analysis Condition Analysis FSH Analysis oggle Analysis Table 3 2 Analysis Toolbar Buttons Command view A dropdown box that Aleve Type beenen PA canalysis allows you to specify the type of code coverage to view in the Code Coverage Analysis Window Covered Menu N A All covered hit items are displayed Missed Menu N A All missed items not executed are displayed Excluded Menu N A Restores the precision to the default value 2 Bookmarks Toolbar The Bookmark toolbar allows you to manage your bookmarks of the Wave window Figure 3 3 Bookmarks Toolbar EREE 54
104. T SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES U S GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS The software and documentation were developed entirely at private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations Accordingly pursuant to FAR 48 CFR 12 212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227 7202 use duplication and disclosure by or for the U S Government or a U S Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in the license agreement provided with the software except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws TRADEMARKS The trademarks logos and service marks Marks used herein are the property of Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark as applicable The use herein of a third party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product but is intended to indicate a product from or associated with a particular third party A current list of Mentor Graphics trademarks may be viewed at www mentor com trademarks Mentor Graphics Corporation 8005 S W Boeckman Road
105. Table 2 1 File Menu Item Description cont Export e Waveform export a created waveform e Tabular list writes List window data to a file in tabular format Event list writes List window data to a file as a Series of transitions that occurred during simulation TSSI list writes List window data to a file in TSSI format Image saves an image of the active window e Memory Data saves data from the selected memory in the Memory List window or an active Memory Data window to a text file Column Layout saves a column layout from the active window e HTML opens up a dialog where you can specify the name of an HMTL file and the directory where it is saved Save These menu items change based on the active window Save as Produce a textual report based on the active window Change Directory Opens a browser for you to change your current directory Not available during a simulation or if you have a dataset open Use Source Specifies an alternative file to use for the current source file This mapping only exists for the current simulation This option is only available from the Structure window Source Directory Control which directories are searched for source files Manage datasets for the current session Environment Set up how different windows should be updated by dataset process and or context This is only available when the Structure Locals Processes and Objects windows are activ
106. UI Reference Manual v10 2c 297 GUI Customization User Defined Buttons and Menus PrefMain user_hook preference variable The procs must be saved in a modelsim tcl file located in the install directory for Windows platforms or in the directory from which ModelSim is invoked for other platforms refer to The modelsim tcl File for more information Buttons are added to the Standard toolbar and menus are added to the main menu bar in the GUI The following Tcl example demonstrates two procs that create a menu and two buttons and the syntax for setting the procs with the PrefMain user_hook preference variable Refer to Figure 6 4 Figure 6 4 User Defined Buttons and Menus File Edit View Compile Simulate Add Library Tools Layout Bookmarks Window Help proc AddMyMenus wname global myglobalvar set cmd1l echo my_own_thing Swname set cmd2 echo my_to_upper Swname set cmd3 echo my_to_lower Swname WinName re see add_menu Swname add_menuitem Swname add_separator Swname add_submenu Swname add_menuitem Swname add_menuitem Swname add_submenu Swname add_menucb Swname proc my_buttons args add button Run Long add button Run Short lappend PrefMain user_hook usrMenu usrMenu usrMenu usrMenu usrMenu changeCase usrMenu changeCase usrMenu usrMenu vars run 2 us run 2 ns Menu Item label Do My Own Thing p feses eteHennnsE changeCase To Upper To Lower vars Feature One
107. Visual Elements Figure 1 13 Main Window Menu Bar Context Sensitive Menu File Edit View Compile Simulate Add Wave Tools Layout Window Help Toolbar Frame The toolbar frame contains several toolbars that provide quick access to various commands and functions Figure 1 14 Main Window Toolbar Frame Toolbar Frame Toolbar A toolbar is a collection of GUI elements in the toolbar frame and grouped by similarity of task There are many toolbars available within the GUI refer to the section Toolbars for more information about each toolbar Figure 1 15 highlights the Compile toolbar in the toolbar frame 32 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General Visual Elements Figure 1 15 Main Window Toolbar Compile Toolbar Window ModelSim can display over 40 different windows you can use with your workflow This manual refers to all of these objects as windows even though you can rearrange them such that they appear as a single window with tabs identifying each window Figure 1 16 shows an example of a layout with five windows visible the Structure Objects Processes Wave and Transcript windows ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 33 Overview General Visual Elements Figure 1 16 GUI Windows Bracia Bradati soci zest arb aile da w aiak Hi sik oi prail i Brack proca ox priat praciek precie prai it T peak PRP LOS peat af c cachea
108. Z W H L or Don t Care Then the entry for the corresponding value in the LogicStyleTable is used to determine what is drawn in the Wave window The line style is either Solid or DoubleDash The line is drawn in the color specified Lastly the line is drawn at the top of the row 2 the middle of the row 1 or the bottom of the row 0 The mapping of bit values to the 9 states is specified in the ListTranslateTable The table is searched to find a matching value When a match is found the corresponding table entry defines the 9 state value used to define the style Table 7 2 Default ListTranslateTable Values toaew iW look loon tose 310 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Preferences GUI Preference Variables Table 7 3 Default LogicStyleTable Values rocco sold fem o LOGIC bomedi aro o Figure 7 4 Modifying zna Display Attributes in the Wave Window x By Window By Name alal Preferences Preference ttem vae Description 2 LOGIC_H Specfies which type enumerations map into LOGIC_H This mapping is used for vectors only scalars i LOGIC_L Specifies which type enumerations map into LOGIC_L This mapping is used for vectors only scalars z LOGIC_U U Specifies which type enumerations map into LOGIC_U This mapping is used for vectors only scalars i LOGIC _W Ww Specifies which type enumerations map into LOGIC W This mapping is used for vectors only scalars LOGIC_X xx Specifi
109. _d ck_noeedge nregedge Tewnglhecks b zA Eno 3 fed celk v15 fssupi d 20 ns posedge ck 25 ns 8 ns 316 nsii dck Aopv celle 15 R cels I Sohal d2 2216 Sreto aek J Aon oetevtis cel 15 sebup d 40 riz poredge clk 45 ne 8 ne fed celle 16 hoki posedge chk 25 ns d 30 ne 9 ris S316 Mri cd Apu cellay 16 HA Warning 3 Fer Neston ee e O0 best adi 1 8 Table 4 45 Message Viewer Tasks Display a detailed description of the Right click the message text message then select View Verbose Message Open message in Source window Double click the message in the Message Column Expand a hierarchical node Double click on a non leaf node in the Messages column Open the source file and add a bookmark to Double click the object name s the location of the object s Change the focus of the Structure and Double click the hierarchical Objects windows reference Open the source file and set a marker at the Double click the file name line number GUI Elements of the Message Viewer Window This section describes the GUI elements specific to this window 184 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Message Viewer Window Column Descriptions Table 4 46 Message Viewer Window Columns Category Keyword for the various categories of messages DISPLAY TCHK VCD VITAL WLE MISC lt user defined gt Date Date Date the test was run test Date the test
110. _out Oxff0468b0 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 266 Window Reference Watch Window Watch Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Watch window Adding Objects to the Watch Window To add objects to the Watch window drag and drop objects from the Structure window or from any of the following windows List Locals Objects Source and Wave You can also use the Add Selected to Window Button You can also use the add watch command Expanding Objects to Show Individual Bits If you add an array or record to the window you can view individual bit values by double clicking the array or record As shown in Figure 4 92 ram_tb spram4 mem has been expanded to show all the individual bit values Notice the arrow that ties the array to the individual bit display Figure 4 92 Expanded Array waten nix File Edit View Add Tools Window tram bi sprandimem 0x7e770368 fram_tb spramajmem 1 Ox7e 78468 a 0 socom fess 1 sooo 2 somone 3 somone 4 socom 5 soc 6 somone 7 somone 8 sooo 9 somone 10 SAAANA 11 SAAS AXNXXAAXXX 12 sooo 13 cooooooccen GUI Elements of the Watch Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 267 Window Reference Watch Window Graphical Element The primary graphical element of the watch window is the item box which typic
111. _testerfcover_s_h SVA Ta OF 4 1 Unlimited 1 100 is HS Jinterleaver_testerfs_hs_ma G interleaver _kester aip finterleaver bester dow interleaver bester dow THA finterleaver_testerfcover__s_h Unlimited 1 100 FHA Jinterleaver_testerfcover__ sh Unlimited 1 100 FHA Jinterleaver_testerfcover_s_h Unlimited 1 100 a finterleaver_tester finterleaver 1 Unlimited 1 100 GUI Elements of the Cover Directives Window Column Descriptions Table 4 17 Cover Directives Window Columns AtLeast number of times a directive has to fire to be considered 100 covered coverage percentage for a directive The percentage is the lesser of 100 or Count divided by AtLeast ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 111 Window Reference Cover Directives Window Table 4 17 Cover Directives Window Columns cont Cmplt graph graphical bar chart of the completion percentage Directives with 100 coverage are displayed in green Count number of times a directive has fired during the current simulation design unit to which the directive is bound Design Unit Type HDL type of the design unit Not displayed by default Enabled displays a green checkmark when a directive is enabled or a red X when a directive is disabled Included indicates whether the directive is included in aggregate statistics and reports identifies the HDL used to write the assertion Limit number of times the directive will exec
112. able 4 37 Locals Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem View Declaration Displays in the Source window the declaration of the object Adds the selected object s to the specified window Wave List Log Dataflow Schematic Copies selected item to clipboard Find Opens the Find toolbar at the bottom of the window Expand Collapse Expands or collapses data in the window Global Signal Radix Sets radix for selected signal s in all windows Displays the Change Selected Variable Dialog Box which allows you to alter the value of the object ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 171 Window Reference Locals Window Change Selected Variable Dialog Box This dialog box allows you to change the value of the object you selected When you click Change the tool executes the change command on the object Figure 4 41 Change Selected Variable Dialog Box x Variable Name top c cache_inst3 line__43 addr_size Value g Change Cancel The Change Selected Variable dialog is prepopulated with the following information about the object you had selected in the Locals window Variable Name contains the complete name of the object Value contains the current value of the object When you change the value of the object you can enter any value that is valid for the variable An array value must be specified as a string without surrounding quotation marks To modify the values in a record you need to change each field
113. abular format Equivalent to the command write list lt filename gt File gt Export gt Event List Exports the information in the List window to a file in print on change format Equivalent to the command write list event lt filename gt File gt Export gt TSSI List Exports the information in the List window to a file in TSSI Equivalent to the command write tssi event lt filename gt Edit gt Signal Search Allows you to search the List window for activity on the selected signal GUI Elements of the List Window This section describes the GUI elements specific to the List window Window Panes The List window is divided into two adjustable panes which allow you to scroll horizontally through the listing on the right while keeping time and delta visible on the left e The left pane shows the time and any deltas that exist for a given time The right pane contains the data for the signals and objects you have added for each time shown in the left pane The top portion of the window contains the names of the signals The bottom portion shows the signal values for the related time Note The display of time values in the left column is limited to 10 characters Any time value of more than 10 characters is replaced with the following too narrow ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 167 Window Reference List Window Markers The markers in the List window are analo
114. ace next event the next input event driving the selected output Trace Set Menu Tools gt Trace gt Trace event set Jump to the source of the selected input event Return the next event cursor to the selected output Trace Net to Menu Tools gt Trace gt Driver of X Step back to the last driver of TracexX an unknown value Expand Net to all Drivers Trace Reset Menu Tools gt Trace gt Trace event reset Expand Net to all Drivers and Readers ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Display driver s of the selected signal net or register Display driver s and reader s of the selected signal net or register 65 Toolbars Simulate Toolbar Table 3 17 Schematic Toolbar Buttons cont Expand Net None Display reader s of the E to all Readers selected signal net or register Remove All Highlights Delete Content Enable 1 Click Mode Menu Dataflow gt Remove Highlight or Schematic gt Edit gt Remove Highlight Menu Dataflow gt Delete or Schematic gt Edit gt Delete Schematic gt Edit gt Delete All Menu Dataflow gt Regenerate or Schematic gt Edit gt Regenerate Clear the red highlighting identifying the path you ve traversed through the design Click and hold the button to open a drop down menu with the following options e Remove All Highlights Remove Selected Highlights Set Default Action Delete the sel
115. ae ea bee eee eee ae ee ee 47 OOS MICO cucne4 oan tae ere eae ee tae eee ae eon eee ee ee ees 47 IsAavOUL MCW o3 densneceneaeeauedeasnesedeasesee ceasaseeseneesatdeusureaes 49 Bookmarks Menu nnannnaan naana 49 baaie a E a E E E EE E E EE N E tee 49 Joeom e i EE EE EEE EEEN EEEE TEE EEEE E T 51 Chapter 3 LOGIDGTS 4 c012 4n eee es ape haga saseoa dese read ner phases ta pate dsee peesaeewres 53 BY TODAS csekpadewattyhedasakee dbwaat pie padaiea EEEE deen 53 Analysis TOO Dar 2 i044 Oeee din doe Coed Ode edn Poe Red bee we odad boa Reed 54 BOOnKmatks TOODE cacao aes eee nee nee EOE ATIRE EARNER ERT eee EREE 54 Column Layout Toolbar 1 0 0 eee eee ene eens 55 SaN e EPET ETET ETE EEEE E EE 56 Coverage Toolbar 0 06 456 ti0 dates etnee ded bon Gets boo oe dd hw Keene Bode debe 57 Datalow NOGA wacetwes ss dent pera debeease dent EA hehe enn deen 58 PSM TOOD epr eree EERE aaaean ane EER EEE ER ae eee ee 59 elene LOOMiDar E E E T E E bode dha E E 60 Layout Tooli e eea ar une a oo he che Chee oe a eee a bed 6l Memory Toolbar sse 60420424 244 84 ANAE EE A A a 6l ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 3 Table of Contents Mode TOOlDAT jan cwretec be eed oes eee beeen ened areata ce bees oe eee eee ee 61 Objectfilter Toolbar s 24 6 i508 seve dads bo56 Kod boee hoo oes Khe de beeen dee bees deed 62 Precision TOOlbat 0 n24 cee e ce dase oe beedewe asad desde eeed ea pesade se eeb seats 63 Process Too Dal 6 ince ccacsadae a
116. age The Coverage Details window displays the following information about Finite State Machine Coverage metrics e Finite State Machine the name of the finite state machine e Instance the dataset name followed by the hierarchical location of the FSM Only appears when you are analyzing coverage metrics by instance e State Coverage a list of all the states followed by the number of hits Transition Coverage a list of all the transitions followed by the number hits State Coverage the coverage percentage for the states e Transition Coverage the coverage percentage for the transitions FSM details are displayed as shown in Figure 4 13 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 117 Window Reference Coverage Details Window Figure 4 13 Coverage Details Window Showing FSM Details 118 Finite State Machine Instance sim test sm sm_seqU sm_U state gt gletd gt 93749 TL 15625 RD Wo 1 gt RO Wo 2 RD Wo 1 IDLE WT ELE 1 gt WI ELK 2 WI BLE 1 gt IDLE WI WOD 1 gt WI WD 2 WI Wo 1 gt IDLE gt IDLE WI WD 2 gt IDLE WT ELE Z gt WI ELK 3 WI BLE 2 gt IDLE WT ELE 3 gt WI ELK 4 WI BLE 3 gt IDLE WT ELE 4 gt WI ELK 5 WI BLE 4 gt IDLE WI BL 5 gt IDLE CTRL RD Wo 2 gt IDLE State coverage 90 914 Transition coverage 61 90 13 21 gt 31250 0 93749 0 15625 0 31250 0 0 31250 15625 0 15625 0 15625
117. age by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable FEC Condition the number of FEC conditions in each instance rows FEC Conditions hit the number of times the FEC conditions in an instance that have been executed FEC Conditions the number of FEC conditions in an instance that were not executed missed FEC Expression the current ratio of FEC Expression hits to FEC Expression rows FEC Expression a bar chart displaying the FEC Expression if the percentage is below graph 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable FEC Expression the number of executable expressions in each instance rows FEC Expressions the number of times expressions in an instance have been executed hit FEC Expressions the number of executable expressions in an instance that were not missed executed the current ratio of State hits to State rows State graph a bar chart displaying the State if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Stmt graph a bar chart displaying the Stmt if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Stmt count the number of executable statements in
118. ails Refer to Viewing Causality Path Details e Preferences Refer to Setting Causality Traceback Preferences e Set Default Action Selecting one of the items from the dropdown menu sets that item as the default action when you click the Event Traceback button The title of the selection is shown in bold type in the Event Traceback dropdown menu and two asterisks are placed after the title to indicate the current default action For example Show Cause is the default action in Figure 3 19 For more information refer to Using Causality Traceback Source Toolbar The Source toolbar allows you to perform several activities on Source windows ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 69 Toolbars Standard Toolbar Figure 3 20 Source Toolbar XOX p B Table 3 19 Source Toolbar Buttons Previous None Jump to previous line with Kd Zero Hits zero coverage Next Zero None Jump to next line with zero PH Hits coverage Show Menu Source gt Display language templates in Language Show Language Templates the left hand side of every open Templates source file Source Menu Source gt Allows Debugging with Annotation Show Annotation Source Annotation in every open source file Clear Menu Source gt Removes any bookmarks in Bookmarks Clear Bookmarks the active source file Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar contains common buttons that apply to most windows Figure 3 21 S
119. al GUI Tasks You can access this feature by selecting Window gt Enable Scribble Mode from either the main window or a separate window A new window with a red border is superimposed over a window or the desktop and access to all window and toolbar functions are suspended until you exit Scribble Mode Use the left mouse button to draw and drag a text box into position Use the right mouse button to open a menu with the following options Table 1 1 Scribble Mode Menu Add Text Opens the Scribble Text dialog box for entering and formatting text Attributes Choose color and line thickness Clear Items Choose which graphic elements to delete Save Image Saves the image as a bitmap to the current directory Font Management You may need to adjust font settings to accommodate the aspect ratios of wide screen and double screen displays or to handle launching ModelSim from an X session Refer to Making Global Font Changes for more information Font Scaling To change font scaling select the Transcript window then Transcript gt Adjust Font Scaling You will need a ruler to complete the instructions in the lower right corner of the dialog When you have entered the pixel and inches information click OK to close the dialog Then restart ModelSim to see the change This is a one time setting you should not need to set it again unless you change display resolution or the hardware monitor or video card The font scaling applies to Windows
120. ally shows information about a single signal The item can also be a group of signals created with the group popup window option Header shows the signal name followed parenthetically by its address if it has one Body shows the current value of the signal Values that are red have changed since the previous run command System Verilog Classes Items are displayed in a scrollable hierarchical list such as in Figure 4 93 where extended SystemVerilog classes hierarchically display their super members Current Time Label Displays the Current Time or the Now end of simulation time This is the time used to control state values annotated in the window For details refer to Current Time Label Figure 4 93 Scrollable Hierarchical Display waten ox File Edit View Add Tools Window Watch aa gm ftopfscorebd af Ox7e8b1290 ftopy stimjrequest_Fifo 0x7e8b0710 husuper super lavm_pkg avin _named_ asuper laym_pkgiaym_named_comp name scb_af fifo M_name request_fifa parent null M_parent null amn _children children mmh 4 4 moh it 6 named object repository s_named_object_repository 5 s_ orphans 4 s_orphans f hosuper Qavm pkg tlm _Fifo tlm _Fifo 2 m Lah analysis export M_size 1 Put export 4 Blocking _puk_expork Monblocking_ puk_export Two Ref handles that
121. alog 0 0 0 00 cece eee 210 Figure 4 64 Current Time Label in the Schematic Window 000 ee 211 Figure 4 65 Source Window Showing Language Templates 004 215 Figure 4 66 Displaying Multiple Source Files 0 0 0 0 ee eee 217 Figure 4 67 Setting Context from Source Files 2 0 0 0 0 cc cee eens 218 Figure 4 68 Coverage in Source Window 2 cece ce eee eens 220 Figure 4 69 Source Annotation Example 0 0 0 ccc ccc eens 224 Figure 4 70 Popup Menu Choices for Textual Dataflow Information 2 Figure 4 71 Window Shows all Driving Processes 0 00 e eee eens 226 Figure 4 72 Source Readers Dialog Displays All Signal Readers 226 Figure 4 73 Language Templates 0 0 ccc eee eee e eas 22 Figure 4 74 Create New Design Wizard 0 00 eens 228 Figure 4 75 Language Template Context Menus 0 0 ccc cece eee eee 229 Figure 4 76 Breakpoint in the Source Window 0 cc cece eee ee eens 230 Figure 4 77 Modifying Existing Breakpoints 0 ccc eee eee eens 232 Figure 4 78 Source Code for SOUrCE SV 2 ene eee eee enees 253 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 11 List of Figures Figure 4 79 Source Window Description 0 0 0 0 0 ccc ccc eens 236 Figure 4 80 Source Window with Find Toolbar 20 0 eee 237 Figure 4 81 Preferences Dialog for Customiz
122. alog box Hotkey Ctrl f Windows or Ctrl s UNIX E Collapse All Menu Edit gt Expand gt E Collapse All 1 You can set the default insertion location in the Wave window from menus and hotkeys with the PrefWave InsertMode preference variable Add Selected to Window Button This button is available when you have selected an object in any of the following windows Dataflow List Locals Memory Objects Process Schematic Structure Watch and Wave windows Using a single click the objects are added to the Wave window However if you click and hold the button you can access additional options via a dropdown menu as shown in Figure 3 22 Figure 3 22 Add Selected to Window Dropdown Menu OH 4 4 9 8 3 gg Add to Wave Insertion Point Big Add to Wave Append Point Bi Add to Wave End 1 Add to Wave Top He Add to List S Add to Schematic TE Add to Dataflow fais Add to Watch a Set Default Action 72 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Step Toolbar e Add to Wave Anchor Location Adds selected signals above the Insertion Point Bar in the Pathname Pane by default e Add to Wave Append Point Adds selected signals below the insertion pointer in the Pathname Pane e Add to Wave End Adds selected signals after the last signal in the Wave Window e Add to Wave Top Adds selected signals above the first signal in the Wave window e Add to List Adds sel
123. alue 0 indicatoron 1 proc my_buttons args add button Run Long run 2 us add button Run Short run 2 ns lappend PrefMain user_hook AddMyMenus my_buttons e Menu proc Adds a menu to the Main menu bar containing a top level item labeled Do My Own Thing which prints my_own_thing signals It adds a cascading submenu labeled changeCase with two entries To Upper and To Lower which echo my_to_upper and my_to_lower respectively The menu selection UserMenu gt Vars gt Feature One sets a checkbox that controls the value of myglobalvar signals one e Button proc ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 309 GUI Preferences GUI Preference Variables Adds two buttons to the Standard tool bar The first Run Long runs the simulation for 2 us the second Run Short runs the simulation for 2 ns The line lappend PrefMain user_hook AddMyMenus my_buttons appends the two procs AddMyMenus and my_buttons to the user_hook variable when ModelSim is finished initializing Multiple procs are specified as a space separated list This example is available in the following modelsim tcl file lt install_dir gt examples gui addmenu modelsim tcl GUI Preference Variables Wave Window Variables The LogicStyleTable combined with the ListTranslateTable define how single bit waveforms are displayed in the Wave window The single value is first mapped into one of nine 9 possible states U 0 1 X
124. alue of the Pa Value Wave Editor gt Value selected section of the Command wave edit waveform change_value Stretch Edge Menu Wave gt Move the selected edge by gt Wave Editor gt Stretch Edge increasing decreasing Command wave edit stretch waveform duration Move Edge Menu Wave gt Move the selected edge Wave Editor gt Move Edge without increasing decreasing Command wave edit move waveform duration Extend All Menu Wave gt Increase the duration of all Waves Wave Editor gt editable waves Extend All Waves Command wave edit extend 78 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Wave Expand Time Toolbar Wave Expand Time Toolbar The Wave Expand Time toolbar provides access to enabling and controlling wave expansion features Figure 3 28 Wave Expand Time Toolbar i mo Table 3 26 Wave Expand Time Toolbar Buttons Expanded Menu Wave gt Expanded turns off the expanded time Time Off Time gt Off display default mode Expanded Menu Wave gt Expanded displays delta time steps Time Deltas Time gt Deltas Mode Expanded Menu Wave gt Expanded displays event time steps Time Events Time gt Events Mode Expand All Menu Wave gt Expanded expands simulation time over Time gt Expand All the entire simulation time range from 0 to current time Expand Time Menu Wave gt Expanded expands simulation time at the at Active Time gt Expand Cursor simulation time o
125. and UNIX operating systems On UNIX systems the font scaling is stored based on the DISPLAY environment variable Find and Filter Functions Finding and or filtering capabilities are available for most windows The Find mode toolbar is shown in Figure 1 8 The filtering function is denoted by a Contains field Figure 1 9 Figure 1 8 Find Mode Find EA EP OJ LIE SearchFor fa i ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 25 Overview General GUI Tasks Figure 1 9 Filter Mode Contains A Ce Windows that support both Find Figure 1 8 and Filter modes Figure 1 9 allow you to toggle between the two modes by doing any one of the following e Use the Ctrl M hotkey Click the Find or Contains words in the toolbar at the bottom of the window Select the mode from the Find Options popup menu see Using the Find Options Popup Menu The last selected mode 1s remembered between sessions A Find toolbar will appear along the bottom edge of the active window when you do either of the following e Select Edit gt Find in the menu bar e Click the Find icon in the Standard Toolbar All of the above actions are toggles repeat the action and the Find toolbar will close The Find or Filter entry fields prefill as you type based on the context of the current window selection The find or filter action begins as you type There is a simple history mechanism that saves find or filter stri
126. anges its geometry variable Or you can edit the variables directly either from the prompt in the Transcript window or the Tools gt Edit Preferences menu item Customizing the Simulator GUI Layout There are five predefined layout modes that the GUI will load dependent upon which part of the simulation flow you are currently in They include e NoDesign This layout is the default view when you first open the GUI or quit out of an active simulation Simulate This layout appears after you have begun a simulation with vsim e Coverage This layout appears after you have begun a simulation with the coverage switch or loaded a UCDB dataset e VMemt This layout appears after you have loaded a dataset containing test plan information These layout modes are fully customizable and the GUI stores your manipulations in the modelsim file UNIX and Linux or the registry Windows when you exit the simulation or change to another layout mode The types of manipulations that are stored include showing hiding moving and resizing windows Layout Mode Loading Priority The GUI stores your manipulations on a directory by directory basis and attempts to load a layout mode in the following order 1 Directory The GUI attempts to load any manipulations for the current layout mode based on your current working directory ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 293 GUI Customization Customizing the Simulator GUI Layout
127. anual v10 2c 235 Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 79 Source Window Description Fr CO fquestasim 10 0x examplesftutorialslyvhdlimenorvido syn_ram vhd H Lni 11000 ns ga IF we 1 THEN 0 a memito E A lt data in 44 00101000 00101001 00101010 00101011 00101100 00101101 00101110 OO001101 45 QOOOOOLL 01111010 UUU UUUUUTUU D00000 UU UUUUUUUU DOU OOOO 46 END PROCEDI You can select Source gt Examine Now or Source gt Examine Current Cursor to choose at what simulation time the object is examined or described You can also invoke the examine and or describe commands on the command line or ina macro Marking Lines with Bookmarks Source window bookmarks are blue flags that mark lines in a source file These graphical icons may ease navigation through a large source file by highlighting certain lines As noted above in the discussion about finding text in the Source window you can insert bookmarks on any line containing the text for which you are searching The other method for inserting bookmarks is to right click a line number and select Add Remove Bookmark To remove a bookmark right click the line number and select Add Remove Bookmark again To remove all bookmarks from the Source window select Source gt Clear Bookmarks from the menu bar when the Source window is active Performing Incremental Search for Specific Code The Source window includes a Find function that allo
128. any ee a rE pea Sh ee aor ell l The title bar of the Source window displays your current context parenthetically after the file name and location This changes as you alter your context either through the pop up menu or by changing your selection in the Structure window This functionality allows you to easily navigate your design for debugging purposes by remembering where you have been similar to the functionality in most web browsers The navigation options in the pop up menu function as follows Open Instance changes your context to the instance you have selected within the source file This is not available if you have not placed your cursor in or highlighted the name of an instance within your source file If any ambiguities exists most likely due to generate statements this option opens a dialog box allowing you to choose from all available instances e Ascend Env changes your context to the file and line number in the parent region where the current region is instantiated This is not available 1f you are at the top level of your design e Forward Back allows you to change to previously selected contexts This is not available if you have not changed your context The Open Instance option is essentially executing an environment command to change your context therefore any time you use this command manually at the command prompt that information is also saved for use with the Forward Back options
129. arch for Expression selection e Issue a searchlog command using foo searchlog expr foo 0 158 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference List Window Formatting the List Window Setting List Window Display Properties Before you add objects to the List window you can set the window s display properties To change when and how a signal is displayed in the List window select Tools gt List Preferences from the List window menu bar when the window is undocked Figure 4 34 Modifying List Window Display Properties x window Properties Triggers alal Signal Mames lo Path Elements 0 for Full Path Max Tithe Fos 5 Dataset Prete Always Show Dataset Prefixes Show Dataset Prefixes if 2 or more C Never Show Dataset Prefixes Always undock list windows OF Cancel Apply Formatting Objects in the List Window You can adjust various properties of objects to create the view you find most useful Select one or more objects and then select View gt Signal Properties from the List window menu bar when the window is undocked Changing Radix base for the List Window One common adjustment you can make to the List window display is to change the radix base of an object To do this choose View gt Properties from the main menu which displays the List Signal Properties dialog box Figure 4 35 shows the list of radix types you can select in this dialog box ModelSim SE GUI Ref
130. as a window specific menu that appears in the menu bar between the Add and Tools menus The menu options available pertain only to that window and are described in the window specific section of the chapter Window Reference ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 41 Menus File Menu File Menu Table 2 1 File Menu Item Description Menu Ken Folder create a new folder in the current directory Source create anew VHDL Verilog or other source file Project create a new project Library create a new library and mapping Debug Archive archive debug data for post simulation analysis Refer to the archive write command for more information Open a file of any type e Macro File Load and run a macro file do or tcl Debug Archive load archived debug data for post simulation analysis Refer to the archive load command for more information Close an opened file Library import FPGA libraries e EVCD import an extended VCD file previously created with the ModelSim Waveform Editor This item is enabled only when a Wave window is active Memory Data initialize a memory by reloading a previously saved memory file Test Plan import a verification management test plan Only applies to the Verification Management Browser window Column Layout apply a previously saved column layout to the active window 42 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Menus File Menu
131. athname of the process State Process state Refer to the section Process State Definitions for more information Type Process type according to the language Refer to the section Process Type Definitions for more information Process State Definitions The process states reported under the State column heading are Idle Indicates an inactive SystemC Method or a process that has never been active The Idle state will occur only for SC processes or methods It will never occur for HDL processes Wait Indicates the process is waiting for a wake up trigger change in VHDL signal Verilog net SystemC signal or a time period Ready Indicates the process is scheduled to be executed in current simulation phase or in active simulation queue of current delta cycle Active Indicates the process is currently active and being executed Queued Indicates the process is scheduled to be executed in current delta cycle but not in current simulation phase or in active simulation queue Done Indicates the process has been terminated and will never restart during current simulation run ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 199 Window Reference Processes Window Processes in the Idle and Wait states are distinguished as follows Idle processes except for ScMethods have never been executed before in the simulation and therefore have never been suspended Idle processes will become Active Ready
132. ation o Click anywhere in the message bar then use Tab or Shift Tab to cycle the cursor between error messages either forward or backward respectively Display the Message Viewer Window Double click anywhere amongst the message indicators e Display in the Message Viewer window the message entry related to a specific indicator Double click on any message indicator This function only works if you are using the Message Viewer in flat mode To display your messages in flat mode a Right click in the Message Viewer and select Display Options b In the Message Viewer Display Options dialog box deselect Display with Hierarchy ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 217 Window Reference Wave Window View Objects Window Button This button opens the Objects window with a single click However if you click and hold the button you can access additional options via a dropdown menu as shown in Figure 4 102 Figure 4 102 View Objects Window Dropdown Menu View Objects Window View Structure Window view Both view Undocked Objects Window View Undocked Structure Window view Both Undacked Assertions Debug Pane The Assert Debug pane displays details on PSL and SVA assertion failures See Analyzing Assertion Failures in the Assertion Debug Pane of the Wave Window for more information Wave Window Icons The following icons can be found in the Wave window Table 4 63 Window Icons FSM button E opens the
133. ax e exact indicates that no characters have special meaning thus disabling wildcard features The string entry field of the Contains toolbar item is case insensitive If you need to search for case sensitive strings in the Source window select regular expression and prepend the string with c Using the Find Options Popup Menu When you click the Find Options icon in the Find entry field it will open a Find Options popup menu Figure 1 11 7 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 29 Overview General Visual Elements Figure 1 11 Find Options Popup Menu A o i SearchFor 2 T Contains Ctrl W Find Ctrl M Search Field Exact whole word W Wrap Search Search While Typing Ctl T Recent Searches Execute Search Enter Close Esc The Find Options menu displays the options available to you as well as hot keys for initiating the actions without the menu General Visual Elements This section descibes elements that are used by multiple windows Elements of the Main Window The following sections outline the GUI terminology used in this manual Menu Bar Toolbar Frame Toolbar Window Tab Group Pane The Main window is the primary access point in the GUI Figure 1 12 shows an example of the Main window during a simulation run 30 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General Visual Elements Figure 1 12 Main Window of the GUI Fie Edt View
134. aye 100 assertl iposedge clk a O bRemyotherint 1 Joc 1 data w100 ns E B posedge clk Sirep_vie 1 Day z data_out m BLY assign Mo_Data Mo _Daka Mo Dabta No Dake No Daka Mo Dara No Data No Data Yo Dara P I m s La P I m s La s en mm Refer to the section for more information The ATV window contains four panes 92 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference ATV Window Expression Pane shows a hierarchical representation of the assertion e Thread Viewer Pane shows the progress of the assertion threads over time for a given thread instance and starting time Local Variables Pane shows any values related to local variables in the assertion e Design Objects Pane shows values of the design objects in the expression at that time ATV Window Graphic Symbols The symbols in Table 4 4 indicate the current state of the assert or cover directive Table 4 4 Graphic Symbols for Current Directive State Graphic Symbol Status Information a po Beo pe ao o o iee moo pe Table 4 5 shows the status information that is displayed when you hover the mouse over graphic symbols used to indicate clock thread and directive status Table 4 5 Graphic Symbols for Clock Thread and Directive Status moo pe mo pe ooo C Pms Boolean passed Boolean failed Local variable and value Thread failed but is redundant si
135. branches true conditions or expressions on a particular line have been executed wv Indicates a line of code to which active coverage exclusions have been applied Every item on the line is excluded none are hit Some items are excluded and all items not excluded are hit Some items are excluded and some items not excluded have missing coverage Auto exclusions have been applied to this line Hover the cursor over the E and a tool tip balloon appears with the reason for exclusion Eo Some excluded items are hit Coverage data presented in the Source window is either calculated by file or by instance as indicated just after the source file name If coverage numbers are mismatched between Code Coverage Analysis windows and the Source window check to make sure that both are being calculated the same either by file or by instance To display only numbers in Hits and BC columns select Tools gt Code Coverage gt Show Coverage Numbers When the source window is active you can skip to missed lines three ways 222 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window select Edit gt Previous Coverage Miss and Edit gt Next Coverage Miss from the menu bar click the Previous zero hits and Next zero hits icons on the toolbar e press Shift Tab previous miss or Tab next miss Controlling Data Displayed in a Source Window The Tools gt Code Coverage menu contains
136. breakpoint is evaluating for an id of 7 refer to line 27 Setting a Breakpoint For a Specified Value of Any Instance Enter the following on the command line bp simple sv 13 cond this cnt 8 Results The simulation evaluates the expression at line 13 in the simple sv source file Figure 4 78 continuing the simulation run if the breakpoint evaluates to false When an instance evaluates to true the simulation stops the source is opened and highlights line 13 with a blue arrow The first time cnt 8 evaluates to true the simulation breaks for an instance of module Simple b When you resume the simulation the expression evaluates to cnt 8 again but this time for an instance of module Simple a You can also set this breakpoint with the GUI 1 Right click on line 13 of the simple sv source file 2 Select Edit Breakpoint 13 from the drop menu 3 Enter slash geere ea in the Breakpoint Condition field of the Modify Breakpoint dialog box Refer to Figure 4 77 Note that the file name and line number are automatically entered Checking Object Values and Descriptions You can check the value or description of signals indexes macros and other objects in the Source window There are two quick methods to determine the value and description of an object e Select an object then right click and select Examine or Describe from the context menu e Pause the cursor over an object to see an examine pop up ModelSim SE GUI Reference M
137. c 123 Dataflow Window Use this window to explore the physical connectivity of your design You can also use it to trace events that propagate through the design and to identify the cause of unexpected outputs The Dataflow window displays processes signals nets and registers interconnects The window has built in mappings for all Verilog primitive gates that is AND OR PMOS NMOS and so forth For components other than Verilog primitives you can define a mapping between processes and built in symbols See Symbol Mapping for details Note You cannot view SystemC objects in the Dataflow window Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Dataflow e Command view dataflow ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 124 Window Reference Dataflow Window Figure 4 15 Dataflow Window EJ Dataflow Default HT TH E Now Now F Dataflow Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Dataflow window You can interact with the Dataflow in one of three different Mouse modes which you can change through the DataFlow menu or the Zoom Toolbar Select Mode your left mouse button is used for selecting objects and your middle mouse button is used for zooming the window This is the default mode Zoom Mode your left mouse button is used for zooming the window and your middle mouse button is used for panning the window Pan Mode
138. c ee eens J Table 3 4 Change Column Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 56 Table 3 5 Compile Toolbar Buttons 0 0 000 eens 57 Table 3 6 Coverage Toolbar Buttons 0 0 00 0c eee eens 57 Table 3 7 Dataflow Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 eee eens 58 Table 3 8 FSM Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 cee eens 59 Table 3 9 Help Toolbar Buttons 0 0 eens 60 Table 3 10 Layout Toolbar Buttons 0 0 00 ene ens 61 Table 3 11 Memory Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 eens 6l Table 3 12 Mode Toolbar Buttons 202 g 4s cc0s eeebn4 doeeueneseaeedaudeaewens 62 Table 3 13 Objectfilter Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 0 ee eee 63 Table 3 14 Precision Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 63 Table 3 15 Process Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 0 eee eens 64 Table 3 16 Profile Toolbar Buttons 0 0 00 eee eens 64 Table 3 17 Schematic Toolbar Buttons 0 20 0 0 eens 65 Table 3 18 Simulate Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eae 67 Table 3 19 Source Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 0 cc eee ees 70 Table 3 20 Standard Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 cc eee eee 71 Table 3 21 Step Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 ene eens 73 Table 3 22 Wave Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 cee ene ns 74 Table 3 23 Wave Compare Toolbar Buttons 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 76 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 13 List of Tables Table 3 24 Wave Cursor Toolbar Butt
139. ce Files dialog box to finish compiling the file 6 When the compile error appears in the Transcript window double click on it 7 The source window is opened if needed and the text containing the error is highlighted 8 To remove the highlighting choose Source gt More gt Clear Highlights Hyperlinked Underlined Text in a Source Window The Source window supports hyperlinked navigation providing links displayed as underlined text To turn hyperlinked text on or off in the Source window do the following ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 219 Window Reference Source Window 1 Click anywhere in the Source window This enables the display of the Simulate Toolbar 2 Click the Source Navigation button When you double click on hyperlinked text the selection jumps from the usage of an object to its declaration This provides the following operations Jump from the usage of a signal parameter macro or a variable to its declaration e Jump from a module declaration to its instantiation and vice versa e Navigate back and forth between visited source files Coverage Data in the Source Window The Source Window includes two columns for code coverage statistics the Hits column and the BC Branch Coverage column These columns provide an immediate visual indication about how your source code is executing The code coverage indicator icons include check marks X s and E s A description of each
140. centage Cover graph a bar chart displaying the Cover directive if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Cover hits the number of cover directives whose count values are greater than or equal to the at_least value Cover misses the number of cover directives whose count values are less than the at_least value Covergroup the number of hits from the total number of covergroups as a percentage Covergroup bins the number of covergroup bins Covergroup graph a bar chart displaying the Covergroup if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green Covergroup hit the number of hit covergroup bins bins Covergroup missed the number of missed covergroup bins bins Covergroup the number of weighted covergroup bins that were missed weighted missed bins the name of the design unit Design Unit Type the type of design unit FEC Condition the current ratio of FEC Condition hits to FEC Condition rows 144 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Instance Coverage Window Table 4 29 Columns in the Instance Coverage Window cont Column name Description FEC Condition a bar chart displaying the FEC Condition if the percentage is below graph 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percent
141. ch export restrictions U S GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS Software was developed entirely at private expense The parties agree that all Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations Accordingly pursuant to U S FAR 48 CFR 12 212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227 7202 use duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U S government or a U S government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement which shall supersede any conflicting terms or conditions in any government order document except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY Mentor Graphics Corporation Mentor Graphics Ireland Limited Microsoft Corporation and other licensors may be third party beneficiaries of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein REVIEW OF LICENSE USAGE Customer will monitor the access to and use of Software With prior written notice and during Customer s normal business hours Mentor Graphics may engage an internationally recognized accounting firm to review Customer s software monitoring system and records deemed relevant by the internationally recognized accounting firm to confirm Customer s compliance with the terms of this Agreement or U S or other local export laws Such review may include FlexNet or successor product report log files that Customer shall capture and prov
142. cked Signal Values Display signal values when checked Show All Display all of the above Hide All Hide all of the above 2 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Source Window The Source window allows you to view and edit source files as well as set breakpoints step through design files and view code coverage statistics By default the Source window displays your source code with line numbers You may also see the following graphic elements Red line numbers denote executable lines where you can set a breakpoint Blue arrow denotes the currently active line or a process that you have selected in the Processes Window Red ball in line number column denotes file line breakpoints gray ball denotes breakpoints that are currently disabled Blue flag in line number column denotes line bookmarks Language Templates pane displays templates for writing code in VHDL Verilog SystemC Verilog 95 and SystemVerilog Figure 4 65 See Language Templates Figure 4 65 Source Window Showing Language Templates fl C examples tutorials verilog basicSimulation toounter v test counter Default Language Templates an Create Testbench al initial Clock generator H Language Constructs 18 begin Module 19 clk 0 Primitive 2068F forever 10 clk clk D Declarations Statements H Instantiations end initial Test stimulus f Module T Gate 24 begin T
143. criptions when B you mouse over the option GUI Elements of the Schematic Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Popup Menu for Both Incremental and Full Views Right click anywhere in the Incremental View to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 52 Schematic Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tiem View Selection Declaration Instantiation FSM Viewer Wave Pane This Window New Window Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Full Zoom Selected Zoom Highlight o a 212 Opens a Source window to the line of code where the object is declared Applies only to modules Opens a Source window to the line of code where the module is instantiated Displays the selected item in the FSM Viewer Displays selected signals in embedded Wave viewer Erase contents of current Incremental view and redraw only selected object Redraw selected object s in Incremental View of new Schematic window Zoom in 2x Zoom out 2x Zoom so all objects fits into display Zoom into the selected object Zoom into the highlighted object Hides or shows the contents of selected instance or abstract block Displays folded instance or abstract block as a solid blue box with dashed border ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Expand Net To Event Traceback Highlight Add Readers Drivers amp Readers Fanins Fanouts Fanins amp Fanouts Design Inputs Hierarchy Inputs Show
144. cting Bookmarks gt Add Bookmark or by clicking the Add Bookmark button You will be prompted to automatically save and restore your bookmarks when you set the first bookmark You can change the automatic save and restore settings in the Bookmark Options Dialog Box e Add Custom Selecting Add Custom opens the New Bookmark dialog box with the context field s populated and a field for specifying an alias for the bookmark Click and hold the Add Bookmark button to access this feature from the Bookmarks toolbar Note ___ Aliases are mapped to the window in which a bookmark is set You can use the same alias for different bookmarks as long as each alias is assigned to a bookmark set in a different window Deleting Bookmarks You can choose to delete the bookmarks from the currently active window or from all windows e Manage Bookmarks Opens the Manage Bookmarks dialog box Refer to Managing Your Bookmarks for more information e Load Bookmarks Loads the bookmarks saved in the bookmarks do file You can choose whether to load bookmarks for the currently active window or all the bookmarks saved in the bookmarks do file Bookmarks are automatically loaded from the saved bookmarks do file when you start a new simulation session Note __ You must reload bookmarks for a window if you close then reopen that window during the current session e Jump to Bookmark Shows the available bookmarks in the c
145. d specifies that your filter value applies to a specific column of the Message Viewer Inclusion field specifies whether the Column field should or should not contain a given value o For text based filter values your choices are Contains Doesn t Contain or Exact o For numeric and time based filter values your choices are lt lt gt and gt Case Sensitivity field specifies whether your filter rule should treat your filter value as Case Sensitive or Case Insensitive This field only applies to text based filter values ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Message Viewer Window Filter Value field specifies the filter value associated with your filter rule Time Unit field specifies the time unit Your choices are fs ps ns us ms This field only applies to the Time selection from the Column field Closed Parenthesis field controls rule groupings by specifying if necessary any closed parentheses The up and down arrows increase or decrease the number of parentheses in the field Figure 4 47 shows an example where you want to show all messages either errors or warnings that reference the 15th line of the file cells v Figure 4 47 Message Viewer Filter Dialog Box Message Viewer Filber Setup Filter OO lfc Ai severity w eontains w tase Insensitive w error Ofer severity w Contains w case Insensitive w earning
146. d Instance Coverage windows Branch None Applies the display filter to all Branch coverage columns in the Structure and Instance Coverage windows Expression None Applies the display filter to all Expression coverage columns in the Structure and Instance Coverage windows Toggle None Applies the display filter to all Toggle coverage columns in the Structure and Instance Coverage windows Dataflow Toolbar The Dataflow toolbar provides access to various tools to use in the Dataflow window gt Condition None Applies the display filter to all u Condition coverage columns in the Structure and Instance Coverage windows Figure 3 7 Dataflow Toolbar Ie e gt He Be Table 3 7 Dataflow Toolbar Buttons Trace Input Menu Tools gt Trace gt Move the next event cursor to Net to Event Trace next event the next input event driving the selected output 58 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars FSM Toolbar Table 3 7 Dataflow Toolbar Buttons cont Trace Net to Menu Tools gt Trace gt Driver of X TraceX Expand Net to all Drivers Expand Net to all Drivers and Readers Expand Net to all Readers Trace Set Menu Tools gt Trace gt Trace event set Trace Reset Menu Tools gt Trace gt Trace event reset Jump to the source of the selected input event Return the next event cursor to the selected output Step back to the last driver of an unknown value Displa
147. d PSL cover directives Covergroups Window manages SystemVerilog covergroups Coverage Details Window contains details about coverage metrics based on selections in other coverage windows Dataflow Window displays physical connectivity and lets you trace events causality Files Window displays the source files and their locations for the loaded simulation FSM List Window lists all recognized FSMs in the design FSM Viewer Window graphical representation of a recognized FSM Instance Coverage Window displays coverage statistics for each instance in a flat non hierarchical view Library Window lists design libraries and compiled design units ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 83 Window Reference Table 4 1 GUI Windows cont List Window Shows waveform data in a tabular format Locals Window displays data objects that are immediately visible at the current execution point of the selected process Memory List Window windows that show memories and their contents Memory Data Window Message Viewer Window allows easy access organization and analysis of Note Warning Errors or other messages written to transcript during simulation Objects Window displays all declared data objects in the current scope OVM Aware Debug Windows _ windows to assist in debugging OVM testbenches Processes Window displays all processes that are scheduled to run during the current simulation cycle Profiling Windows windows that display performa
148. da oat Bi Henory Windows AnMOTATL ON Objects Window Process Window Schematic Windows Source Windows Structure Windows Wave Windows Window Document Types Regular Text E Ealan ran Tau Regular Text Default Selected Text Background Printing Fonts Spacing Drag Valid Location CHH Parsing Printing Choose Restore defauk fonts Sample Text 01234567500 DErUWoxes The Quick Brown Fox Jumped Over The Lazy Dog OK _ Apply _ camel Select an item from the Category list and then edit the available properties on the right Click OK or Apply to accept the changes The changes will be active for the next Source window you open The changes are saved automatically when you quit ModelSim See Setting Preference Variables from the GUI for details 238 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Structure Window Use this window to view the hierarchical structure of the active simulation The name of the structure window as shown in the title bar or in the tab if grouped with other windows can vary sim This is the name shown for the Structure window for the active simulation dataset_name The Structure window takes the name of any dataset you load through the File gt Datasets menu item or the dataset open command Viewing the Structure Window By default the Structure window opens in a tab group with the Library windows after s
149. dd gt To Schematic menu options Selected Signals Display selected signals Signals in Region Display all signals from the current region Signals in Design Clear the window and display all signals from the entire design Select the object s you want placed in the Schematic Window then click and eS hold the Add Selected to Window Button in the Standard Toolbar and select Add to Schematic e Use the add schematic command Navigating in the Schematic Window You can use the mouse to navigate and select items within the Schematic window The following descriptions are based on the Select mouse mode as set by the Schematic gt Mouse Mode menu e Strokes with the middle mouse button Up Move up in the hierarchy does nothing when you are already at the top level Down Move down in the hierarchy to the selected instance or the instance from which you began the stroke Up Left Zoom full Down Left Zoom in on any selected items Up Right Zoom out The factor of the zoom changes depending on the length of the stroke Down Right Zoom area The box indicates your desired zoom view Zoom in and out with the mouse scroll wheel The view will zoom and center on your mouse location Selecting objects with the left mouse button 208 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Schematic Window Your selection is also reflected in the Structure Objects and Wave windows Si
150. delSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Customization User Defined Radices In addition a general purpose fixed point radix feature is available for displaying any vector regardless of type in a fixed point format in the Wave window You simply have to specify how many bits to use as fraction bits from the whole vector With the Wave window active 1 Select LMB a signal or signals in the Pathnames pane of the Wave window 2 Right click the selected signal s and select Radix gt Fixed Point from the popup menu This opens the Fixed Point Radix dialog Figure 6 8 Fixed Point Radix Dialog Fixed Point Radix xX Fraction Bits DK Cancel 3 Type the number of bits you want to appear as the fraction and click OK ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 303 GUI Customization User Defined Radices 304 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Chapter 7 GUI Preferences simulator GUI Preferences Simulator GUI preferences are stored by default either in the modelsim file in your HOME directory on UNIX Linux platforms or the Registry on Windows platforms Setting Preference Variables from the GUI To edit a variable value from the GUI select Tools gt Edit Preferences The dialog organizes preferences into two tab groups By Window and By Name The By Window tab primarily allows you to change colors and fonts for various GUI objects For example if you want to change the color of the text in the Sourc
151. dobe ea csnaneseeedehebs bane ensecadubesonwe 64 Peolile TOO Dar sa sccccuoad onaaeed Speeweve deneaeee eee e ees ones eee soa eee 64 Schematic 1 OO Dal sc ob shh ee 56 bdo 84 OS OHSS SHS bho Sh ERE ER SS SE DES BEES ESA 65 SiM late Toolbar 424c0045 ethene a cde he eee soe ema ounce ee 66 SOUC LOOlbal s2c54cec5 need r a heed anne E 69 Standard VOOIDAL s x 44 02b heehee ba be nade ek ate ee eb ewe bbe hh ae a ed eels 70 Diep koe ipi a 22222 terrensiecar anew eedeneberaeauetyeaeenee ee 4e ae E 73 Wave FOODS cees aoc at eh bead ow Oe Sa a owe BRO wd koe ow Oe ew ae 74 Wave Compare TOOWArs 2 444546 e4e2405 eae s4beeaeeere renee esses antes ys 76 Wave Cursor Toolbar 0 00 0 ee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee ees TI Wave Edit Toolbar ic c5c0054066 6045045 04Gb eee doe eee Ede eed eee had Gewese 78 Wave Expand Time Toolbar 0 20 0 cc ee eee eee e eens 79 FOO TOODE erer oret o secede st ped VArte eeN FSLN eee ens 79 Tabbed Toolbars i 442252cc 0coeed obo ercenaneseeedeaets badvumnsecadabeareve 80 Window Specific Buttons 0 0 sananne eeann 81 Chapter 4 Window Reference sc 6 6 6 6 6 65 6 666 6 6 64466 60469 56405 66 6446 6 60S6 OE NSSEOR ORES SCRE SS 83 Assertions Window 0 ec ee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee ee eee ees 86 Assertions Window Tasks 00 cc eee ee ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ees 86 GUI Elements of the Assertions Window 0 0 cee eee eee ee eee 86 ATV WO saaa iaai a E E E E ee
152. dow so that all selected objects are visible o Mouse stroke Down Left Panning the View of the Dataflow Window You can pan the view of the Dataflow window with the mouse or keyboard e Pan with the Mouse In Zoom mode pan with the middle mouse button In Pan mode pan with the left mouse button In Select mode pan with the Ctrl key and the middle mouse button e Pan with the Keyboard Use the arrow keys to pan the view Shift lt arrow key gt pans to the far edge of the view Ctrl lt arrow key gt pans by a moderate amount 126 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Dataflow Window Displaying the Wave Viewer Pane You can embed a miniature wave viewer in the Dataflow window Figure 4 16 1 Select the DataFlow gt Show Wave menu item 2 Select a process in the Dataflow pane to populate the Wave pane with signal information Refer to the section Exploring Designs with the Embedded Wave Viewer for more information Figure 4 16 Dataflow Window and Panes FJ Dataflow l o x File Edit view Add Trace Tools Window Dataflow Window Ed Dataflow dataflow ee See w a Ci Ca 5 a Dataflow Pane Cursor 1 1029 ns ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 127 Window Reference Dataflow Window 128 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Files Window Use this window to display the source files and their locations for the loaded simulation Prerequisites
153. e Page Setup Manage the printing of information from the selected window Print Print Postscript ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 43 Menus Edit Menu Edit Menu Table 2 2 Edit Menu Item Description Alter your previous edit in a Source window Redo Use or remove selected text Remove an object from the Wave and List windows Clear the Transcript window Select All Change the selection of items in a window Unselect All Expand or collapse hierarchy information Goto a specific line number in the Source window Find Open the find toolbar Refer to the section Find and Filter Functions for more information Find and replace text in a Source window Signal Search Search the Wave or List windows for a specified value or the next transition for the selected object Find in Files search for text in saved files Previous Coverage Miss Find the previous or next line with missed coverage in the Next Coverage Miss active Source window View Menu Table 2 3 View Menu Item Description Displays the selected window New Window Open additional instances of the Wave List Schematic or Datatlow windows Change the sort order of the Wave window Filters information from the Objects and Structure windows Change the alignment of data in the selected window Properties Displays file property information from the Files or Source windows 44 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Menus Compile Men
154. e w fhopicissidaba mnie Ww fhopicissfatag me Ww ltopimimerm Memory List Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Memory List window Viewing Packed Arrays By default packed dimensions are treated as single vectors in the Memory List window To expand packed dimensions of packed arrays select Memories gt Expand Packed Memories To change the permanent default edit the PrefMemory ExpandPackedMem variable This variable affects only packed arrays If the variable is set to 1 the packed arrays are treated as unpacked arrays and are expanded along the packed dimensions such that they appear as a linearized bit vector Refer to the section Simulator GUI Preferences for details on setting preference variables Viewing Memory Contents When you double click an instance on the Memory List window ModelSim automatically displays a Memory Data window where the name used on the tab is taken from the name of the instance as seen in the Memory window You can also enter the command add mem lt instance gt at the vsim command prompt Viewing Multiple Memory Instances You can view multiple memory instances simultaneously A Memory Data window appears for each instance you double click in the Memory List window When you open more than one 178 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Memory List Window window for the same memory the name of the tab receives an numerical identifier afte
155. e coverage switch e Code Coverage Reports Opens the Coverage Text Report dialog box allowing you to create a coverage report for the selected file Exclude Selected File Executes the coverage exclude command for the selected file s e Clear Code Coverage Data Clears all code coverage information collected during simulation Properties Displays the File Properties dialog box containing information about the selected file Files Menu This menu becomes available in the Main menu when the Files window 1s active Table 4 22 Files Menu Files Menu Tem Opens the selected file in a Source window Open in external editor Opens the selected file in an external editor Only available if you have set the Editor preference set PrefMain Editor lt path_to_executable gt Tools gt Edit Preferences by Name tab Main group Save Files Saves a text file containing a sorted list of unique files one per line The default name is summary txt ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 131 FSM List Window Use this window to view a list of finite state machines in your design Prerequisites This window is populated when you specify any of the following switches during compilation vcom vlog or optimization vopt cover or cover f acc or tacc f Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt FSM List e Command view fsmlist Figure 4 18 FSM
156. e expression is evaluated based on the properties of the current instance Your context must be within a local method of the same class when specifying the keyword this in the condition for a breakpoint Strings are not allowed The conditional breakpoint examples below refer to the following SystemVerilog source code file source sv Figure 4 78 Source Code for source sv ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 233 Window Reference Source Window ONnNAU RFP WN FP 16 17 18 193 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 che 36 37 class Simple integer cnt integer id Simple next function new int x id x cnt 0 next null endfunction task up ent cnt 1 if next begin next up end endtask endclass module test reg cilk Simple a Simple b initial begin a new 7 b new tS end always posedge clk begin a up pup a up end endmodule Prerequisites Compile and load your simulation Note Setting a Breakpoint For a Specific Instance Enter the following on the command line 234 bp simple sv 13 cond this id 7 You must use the acc switch when optimizing with vopt to preserve visibility of SystemVerilog class objects ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Results The simulation breaks at line 13 of the simple sv source file Figure 4 78 the first time module a hits the expression because the
157. e New Creates a new instance of the Wave window and adds the selected object s to that window 192 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Objects Window Table 4 48 Objects Window Popup Menu cont Popup Menu Tiem Add Dataflow Adds the selected object s to a Dataflow window Add the selected object s to any one of the following Wave window List window Log file Schematic window Dataflow window You may choose to add only the Selected Signals all Signals in Region all Signals in Design Event Traceback Enables Causality Traceback e Show Cause Show Driver Show Root Cause Show X Cause ChaseX Copies information about the object to the clipboard Insert Breakpoint Adds a breakpoint for the selected object Toggle Coverage Control toggle coverage of the selected object s Submenus allow the following options Add add to toggle coverage Extended include as extended toggle coverage e Enable enable toggle coverage e Disable disable toggle coverage Reset reset toggle coverage Modify the selected object s by selecting one of the following from the submenu Force opens Force Selected Signal dialog Remove Force remove effect of force command Change Value change value of selected Apply Clock opens Define Clock dialog Apply Wave opens Create Pattern Wizard Opens Signal Radix dialog allowing you to set the radix of selected signal s in all windows Shows list of port
158. e a custom layout follow these steps 1 Rearrange the GUI as you see fit 2 Select Layout gt Save Layout As This displays the Save Current Window Layout dialog box 3 In the Save Layout As field type in a new name for the layout mode 4 Click OK The layout is saved to the modelsim file or registry You can then access this layout mode from the Layout menu or the Layout toolbar Changing Layout Mode Behavior To assign which predefined or custom layout appears in each mode follow these steps 294 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Customization Customizing the Simulator GUI Layout 1 Create your custom layouts as described in Creating a Custom Layout Mode 2 Select Layout gt Configure This displays the Configure Window Layouts Dialog Box 3 Select which layout you want the GUI to load for each scenario This behavior affects the Layout Mode Loading Priority 4 Click OK The layout assignment is saved to the modelsim file or registry Resetting a Layout Mode to its Default To get a layout back to the default arrangement follow these steps 1 Load the layout mode you want to reset via the Layout menu or the Layout toolbar 2 Select Layout gt Reset Deleting a Custom Layout Mode To delete a custom layout follow these steps 1 Load a custom layout mode from the Layout menu or the Layout toolbar 2 Select Layout gt Delete Displays the Delete Custom Layout dialog box 3 Select the
159. e less than the at_least value Cover the number of hits from the total number of cover directives as a percentage Cover graph a bar chart displaying the Cover directive if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable The cover settings used for compilation simulation of that design unit The name of the design unit Design Unit Type The type of design unit Expression rows the number of executable expressions in each level and all levels subsumed under that level Expressions hit the number of times expressions in a level and each level under that level have been executed Expressions missed the number of executable expressions in a level and all levels under that level that were not executed the current ratio of Expression hits to Expression rows Expression graph a bar chart displaying the Expression if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable FEC UDP Files window the number of FEC or UDP conditions in each file Condition rows Structure window the number of conditions in each level and all levels under that level FEC UDP Files window the number of times the FEC or UDP conditions in a Conditions hit file have been executed Structure window
160. e percentage of 1H gt OL and OL gt 1H transitions that have occurred transitions in the first two columns Full the percentage of all transitions that have occurred all six columns the percentage of OL gt Z Z gt OL 1H gt Z and Z gt 1H transitions that have occurred last four columns ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 195 Processes Window Use this window to view a list of HDL and SystemC processes in one of four viewing modes Active default active processes in your simulation In Region process in the selected region Design intended for primary navigation of ESL Electronic System Level designs where processes are a foremost consideration Hierarchy a tree view of any SystemVerilog nested fork joins In addition the data in this window will change as you run your simulation and processes change states or become inactive Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Process Command view process Figure 4 51 Processes Window Processes Active Es ee Name Type filtered state Order _ ParentPath INITIAL 1 Initial Ready 4 itest counter INITIAL 23 Initial Ready 5 itest counter INITIAL 30 Initial Ready 6 itest counter Processes Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Processes window Changing Your Viewing Mode You can change the display to show all the processes in a region or in the
161. e samples collected during the execution of a function or instance to the samples collected in the parent function or instance Not available in the Profile Ranked window Only available in the Profile Design Unit window In lists the ratio as a percentage of the total samples collected during a function or instance In raw lists the raw number of Profiler samples collected during a function or instance lists the amount of memory allocated to a function or instance MemIn lists the ratio as a percentage of the amount of memory allocated to a function or instance to the total memory available MemUnder lists the amount of memory allocated to a function including all support routines under that function or the amount of memory allocated to an instance including all instances beneath it in the structural hierarchy MemUnder lists the ratio as a percentage of the amount of memory allocated to a function and all of its support routines to the total memory available or the ratio of the amount of memory allocated to an instance including all instances beneath it in the structural hierarchy to the total memory available Name lists the parts of the design for which profiling information was captured sum MemIn lists the ratio of the cumulative memory allocated Only available in the Profile Ranked and Profile Design Unit windows sum MemIn lists the cumulative memory allocated Only available in the Profi
162. e window do the following 1 Select Source Windows from the Window List column Window List Dataflow Windows ist Windows ain Window emory Windows active Process Window Objects Window Source Windows Structure Windows ocals Window ave Windows 2 Select Text from the Source Color Scheme column Source Color Scheme Category Text Editor Files Code Browser Annotation Window Document Types ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 305 GUI Preferences Simulator GUI Preferences 3 Click the type of text you want to change Regular Text Selected Text Found Text and so forth from the Colors area Colors Reqular Text 4 Click the Foreground or Background color block Sample Selected Text Foreground Background 5 Select a color from the palette To change the font type and or size of the window selected in the Windows List column use the Fonts section of the By Window tab that appears under General Text Settings Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Change Text Fonts for Selected Windows General Text Settings Fonts Document text Courier New 1o M alz You can also make global font changes to all GUI windows with the Fonts section of the By Window tab Figure 7 2 306 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Preferences Simulator GUI Preferences Figure 7 2 Making Global Font Changes Tahoma 5 Choose Restore default Fonts Pr
163. each level and all levels under that level Stmts hit the number of executable statements that were executed in each level and all levels under that level ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 145 Window Reference Instance Coverage Window Table 4 29 Columns in the Instance Coverage Window cont Column name Description Stmts missed the number of executable statements that were not executed in each level and all levels under that level Toggle the current ratio of Toggle hits to Toggle nodes Toggle graph a bar chart displaying the Toggle if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Toggle nodes the number of points in each instance where the logic will transition from one state to another Toggles hit Toggles hit the number of nodes in each instance that have transitioned at least once _ number of nodes in each instance that have transitioned at least the number of nodes in each instance that have transitioned at least once _ Toggles missed the number of nodes in each instance that have not transitioned at least once Total Coverage The weighted average of all the coverage types functional coverage and code coverage is recursive Deselect Code Coverage gt Enable Recursive Coverage Sums to view results for the local instance See Calculation of Total Coverage for coverage s
164. ected objects to the List Window e Add to Dataflow Adds selected objects to the Dataflow Window e Add to Schematic Adds selected objects to the Schematic Window e Add to Watch Adds selected objects to the Watch Window Set Default Action Selecting one of the items from the dropdown menu sets that item as the default action when you click the Add Selected to Window button The title of the selection is shown in bold type in the Add Selected to Window dropdown menu and two asterisks are placed after the title to indicate the current default action For example Add to Wave Anchor Location is the default action in Figure 3 22 e You can change the default Step Toolbar The Step toolbar allows you to step through your source code Figure 3 23 Step Toolbar tat sas Table 3 21 Step Toolbar Buttons Step Into Command step Step the current simulation to Menu Simulate gt Run gt the next statement Step Er Step Over Command step over Execute HDL statements a Menu Simulate gt Run gt treating them as simple Step Over statements instead of entered and traced line by line ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 73 Toolbars Wave Toolbar Table 3 21 Step Toolbar Buttons cont Step Out Command step out Step the current simulation out of the current function or procedure Step Into Command step current Step the simulation into the Current current instance process or thread
165. ected signal Click and hold the button to open a drop down menu with the following options Delete Selected Delete All Set Default Action Redraws the current schematic view to better take advantage of the available space For example after adding or removing elements Enables single click sprout expansion Default is double click to sprout Show Wave Menu Schematic gt Display the embedded Wave Show Wave Viewer pane Simulate Toolbar The Simulate toolbar provides various tools for controlling your active simulation Figure 3 18 Simulate Toolbar CELTIE io NAS el De 66 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Simulate Toolbar Table 3 18 Simulate Toolbar Buttons Button oP Source Hyperlinking Show Cause Environment Up Environment Back Environment Forward Run Length 100 ns az Continue Run n gli Command find drivers active Command env Menu File gt Environment Command env back Menu File gt Environment Command env forward Menu File gt Environment Command restart Menu Simulate gt Run gt Restart Command run Menu Simulate gt Runtime Options Command run Menu Simulate gt Run gt Run default_run_length Command run continue Menu Simulate gt Run gt Continue Command run all Menu Simulate gt Run gt Run All ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toggles disp
166. eee ee ee 5 Sii s ee RM ee eee ee eee oe The highlighting indicates the following type of information must be entered Yellow Requires user supplied data or string For example module_name in Figure 4 75 must be replaced with the name of the module Green Opens a drop down context menu Selections open more green and yellow highlighted options Red Opens a drop down context menu Selections here can affect multiple code lines Figure 4 75 shows the menu that appears when you double click module_item then select gate_instantiation Setting File Line Breakpoints with the GUI You can easily set file line breakpoints in your source code by clicking your mouse cursor in the line number column of a Source window Click the left mouse button in the line number column next to a red line number and a red ball denoting a breakpoint will appear Figure 4 76 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 229 Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 76 Breakpoint in the Source Window E C examples tutorials verilog dataflow proc v topip Default end endtagsk reg addr size 1 0 a reg word size 1 0 d initial begin ff Set initial state of outputs addr r 0 data r bz rw r 0 strb r l verbose 1 The breakpoint markers are toggles Click once to create the breakpoint click again to disable or enable the breakpoint ENO a When running in full optimization mode breakpoints may not be set Run the design
167. een views by simply clicking this View indicator Figure 4 60 Schematic View Indicator Z Schematic Default Schematic Default View Incrementa View Full BB Follow The Incremental View is ideal for design debugging It allows you to explore design connectivity by tracing signal readers drivers to determine where and why signals change values at various times The Full View is a more static view that can be dynamically linked to your selections in other windows with the Follow selection For information about using this window with a Power Aware simulation refer to the section Power Aware Schematic Display in the Power Aware Simulation User s Manual Prerequisites To create the necessary data to display the schematic you must use the acc switch with the vopt command to provide accessibility into the design for debugging and use the debugdb switch with the vopt command to collect combinatorial and sequential logic data into the work library Note The acc option supports selective visibility into your design in order to reduce the size of the debugging database For example if your testbench has an instance called instDut of the design under test you can use vopt debugdb acc instDut to generate a debug database for only that instance e use the debugdb switch with the vsim command to create the debug database log the results ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual
168. eference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Structure Window Column Descriptions The table below lists columns in the Structure window with a description of their contents Table 4 55 Table 4 55 Columns in the Structure Window Column name Description Assertion hits Assertion hits shows different counts based on whether the assertdebug is used e with assertdebug argument to vsim command number of assertions whose pass count is greater than 0 and fail count is equal to 0 e without assertdebug number of assertions whose fail count is equal to Q the number of assertions whose fail counts are greater than 0 the number of hits from the total number of assertions as a percentage Assertion graph a bar chart displaying the Assertion if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Branch count Files window the number of executable branches in each file Structure window the number of executable branches in each level and all levels under that level Branches hit the number of executable branches that have been executed in the current simulation Branches missed the number of executable branches that were not executed in the current simulation the current ratio of Branch hits to Branch count Branch graph a bar chart displaying the Branch if the percentage is below 90 the ba
169. efinition body 299 V Values of HDL items 235 Variables values of displaying in Objects window 190 317 ABCDEFGH I Verilog language templates 226 source code viewing 215 VHDL language templates 226 source code viewing 215 View grid ATV window 53 viewing 182 Viewing files for the simulation 129 Views schematic 206 Virtual signal 162 W Wave window 271 dashed signal lines 275 format signal 274 saving layout 161 lt Italic gt see also windows Wave window Waveforms viewing 271 Window format saving restoring 24 162 Windows Active Processes pane 196 Assertions 86 Dataflow window 124 List window 150 display properties of 159 formatting HDL items 159 setting triggers 162 165 Locals window 170 Main window status bar 36 time and delta display 36 Objects window 190 Process window specifying next process to be executed 111 viewing processing in the region 111 Signals window VHDL and Verilog items viewed in 190 Source window 215 viewing HDL source code 215 318 JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Variables window VHDL and Verilog items viewed in 170 Wave window 271 save format file 161 windows Main window text editing 285 Source window text editing 285 WLF file saving memories to 179 write format restart 24 162 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c End User License Agreement The latest version of the End User License Agreement is available on line at www
170. el design unit You can add stimulus to your testbench at a later time c Language Constructs Menu driven code templates you can use in your design Includes Modules Primitives Declarations Statements and so on d Stimulus Generators Provides three interactive wizards ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 22 Window Reference Source Window e Create Clock Wizard Steps you through the tasks necessary to add a clock generator to your code It allows you to control a number of clock generation variables e Create Count Wizard Helps you make a counter You can specify various parameters for the counter For example rising falling edge triggered reset active high or low and so on e Create Simulation Stop Wizard The simulation time at which you wish to end your simulation run This adds code that will stop the simulator at a specified time The SystemC language template displays the following options a New Design Wizard Opens the Create New Design Wizard dialog for SystemC source files Figure 4 74 b Language Constructs A list of code templates you can use in your design Language Template Wizards Double click an object in the list to open the Create New Design Wizard Figure 4 74 Simply follow the directions in the wizard to create a new block in your design Figure 4 74 Create New Design Wizard Create New Design Wizard a E A iol x The New Design Wizard will step you
171. elected in the active Structure window line column line and column numbers of the cursor in the active Source window Total Coverage the aggregated coverage as a percent of the top level object in the design coverage mode recursive or non recursive Design Object Icons and Their Meanings The color and shape of icons convey information about the language and type of a design object Table 1 5 shows the icon colors and the languages they indicate Table 1 5 Design Object Icons Here is a list of icon shapes and the design object types they indicate Table 1 6 Icon Shapes and Design Object Types Square any scope VHDL block Verilog named block SC module class interface task function and so forth Square and System Verilog object OVM and UVM test bench scope or red asterix object h o ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 37 Overview General Visual Elements Table 1 6 Icon Shapes and Design Object Types cont Diamond valued object signals nets registers SystemC channel and gt so forth Diamond an editable waveform created with the waveform editor and yellow pulse on red dot Diamond valued object abstract and red asterix Diamond indicates mode In Inout Out of an object port and green arrow assertions SV PSL caution sign on comparison object cover directives SV PSL Star transaction The color of the star for each transaction depends on the language of the reg
172. electing the Active Window for more information Keyboard Shortcuts Opens the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box Refer to User Defined Keyboard Shortcuts for more information Customize Toolbar Add a button to the toolbar frame Toolbars Toggle the appearance of available toolbars Similar behavior to right clicking in the toolbar frame Make the selected window active Windows Display the Windows dialog box which allows you to activate close or undock the selected window s 50 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Help Menu Menus Help Menu Table 2 11 Help Menu Item Description Display ModelSim application information Release Notes Welcome Window Command Completion Register File Types ModelSim Documentation InfoHub ModelSim Documentation PDF Bookcase Tcl Help Display the current Release Notes in the ModelSim Notepad editor You can find past release notes in the lt install_dir gt docs rlsnotes directory Display the Important Information splash screen By default this window is displayed on startup You can disable the automatic display by toggling the Don t show this dialog again radio button Toggles the command completion dropdown box in the transcript window When you start typing a command at the Transcript prompt a dropdown box appears which lists the available commands matching what has been typed so far You may use the Up and Down arrow keys or the mouse to select the d
173. enu Tem Edit Global Signal Chages radix for all displayed signals in Radix Schematic window Undo Undo previous action Redo Redo undone action Cut Cut selected Copy Copy selected Paste Paste selected Delete Delete selected Select Highlighted Make highlighted objects the selected objects Select All Select all objects in display Unselect All Unselect all objects in display Regenerate Layout Regenerates display to improve layout Delete All Deletes everything from Schematic window Find Save Saves everything in Schematic including sticky Opens the Search Bar at bottom of window in the Find mode to make searching for objects easier especially with large designs en notes to a sch file Current Window Restores saved sch file to the current window or New Window to anew window If Current Window is selected the saved sch file overwrites existing information Restore Sticky Note Add Adds sticky note annotation to selected net or component Remove Removes sticky note from selected item Hide Unhide Hides or unhides sticky note for selecte item Hide Unhide All Hides or unhides all sticky notes Show Unconnected Pins Shows or hides unconnected pins in folded instances Instance Names Display instance names when checked Net Names Display net names when checked Net Rip Index Display bus ripper indices when checked Pin Names Display pin names when checked Design Unit Names Display design unit names when che
174. enu Tem Examine Displays the value of the signal over which you used the right mouse button at the time selected with the Active Marker Annotate Diff Allows you to annotate a waveform comparison difference with additional information For more information refer to the compare annotate command Available only during a Waveform Comparison 168 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference List Window Table 4 35 List Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Ten Ignore Diff Flags the waveform compare difference as ignored For more information refer to the compare annotate command Available only during a Waveform Comparison Add Marker Adds a marker at the location of the Active Marker Delete Marker Deletes the closest marker to your mouse location The following menu items are available when the List window is active ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 169 Locals Window Use this window to display data objects declared in the current or local scope of the active process These data objects are immediately visible from the statement that will be executed next which is denoted by a blue arrow in a Source window The contents of the window change from one statement to the next When encountering a C breakpoint the Locals window displays automatic local variables and their value in current C C function scope Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt locals
175. eporting on all or specified DUs test plans or instances filtering the coverage type and the report pathname Text Report opens the Coverage Trend Report Text dialog box where you set whether you are reporting on all or specified DUs test plans or instances filtering the coverage type and the report pathname Create Trend Database opens the Create Trend Database dialog box where you enter the name of the output trend database the Trend UCDB and input UCDBs Export opens the Coverage Trend Report Export dialog box where you set the options as shown for XML or HTML report and export the report into a comma Separated value csv or other format file View Trender opens the Trender window in the Main window In this window right click on any coverage object to display a trend graph for that object ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Verification Management Browser Window Popup Menu Right click on one of the UCDBs in the Browser window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options in addition to those listed in Table 4 58 Table 4 59 Verification Management Browser Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem Expand Collapse Selected Expand or collapse selected UCDBs Expand Collapse All Expand or collapse all UCDBs Save Format Saves the current contents of the browser to a do file Load Loads a do file that contains a previously saved browser layou
176. er Display Source Code of a Structure Window Object You can highlight the line of code that declares a given object in the following ways e Double click on an object Opens the file in a new Source window or activates the file if it is already open e Single click on an object Highlights the code if the file is already showing in an active Source window Add Structure Window Objects to Other Windows You can add objects from the Structure window to the Dataflow window Schematic window List window Watch window or Wave window in the following ways e Mouse Drag and drop Menu Selection Add gt To window Toolbar Add Selected to Window Button gt Add to window e Command add list add wave or add dataflow When you drag and drop objects from the Structure window to the Wave Dataflow or Schematic windows the add wave add dataflow and add schematic respectively commands will be reflected in the Transcript window Finding Items in the Structure Window To find items in the Structure window press Ctrl F on your keyboard with the Structure window active This opens the Find bar at the bottom of the window Refer to Find and Filter Functions section for details As you type in the Find field a popup window opens to display a 242 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Structure Window list of matches Figure 4 83 With Search While Typing enabled the default each key
177. erence Manual v10 2c 159 Window Reference List Window Figure 4 35 List Signal Properties Dialog List Signal Properties i f IOl x Signal Display Mame RadixEnum pa cu mo ri Symbolic Numeric Default Symbolic Binary Octal Decimal Unsigned width Characters Hexadecimal ASCII Triggeri Time Triggers line Default Does not trigger line eoeepeeeee eo OK Cancel Apply The default radix type is symbolic which means that for an enumerated type the window lists the actual values of the enumerated type of that object For the other radix types binary octal decimal unsigned hexadecimal ASCII time the object value is converted to an appropriate representation in that radix Changing the radix can make it easier to view information in the List window Compare the image below with decimal values with the image in the section List Window with symbolic values 160 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c File Edit Jeb g BOo Me o p test sm rst est smout of test su clk PST delta egol 0 BS0000 0 631000 1 691000 z B35000 0 700000 0 7TO3000 1 Floooo 0 Fliooo 1 FTllooo Z 715000 0 164 lines 4 Figure 4 36 Changing the Radix in the List Window View Odd Tools Window ftest sm dat test sm addr ftest smout wires 205 205 z055 205 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 OOOO oOo oOo oO oO
178. es 229 21 1K Blocks 576 36 9K pd System task instances J45 17a 4K Verilog Ports 16 9446 ied Continuous assignment 3 3966 Initial 73 3 3K FS Always 16 1 8K FS Nets 26 2 3K ee Parameters oo 2k IS Registers 75 91 GUI Elements of the Capacity Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Column Descriptions Table 4 9 Capacity Window Columns Type Object Refer to the section T ype Object Listing ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 97 Window Reference Capacity Window Table 4 9 Capacity Window Columns cont Quantity of design objects analyzed Current amount of memory allocated in bytes Peak Memory Peak amount of memory allocated in bytes The time in ns at which the peak memory was reached Type Object Listing When your design contains Verilog design units you will see the following entries in the Type Object column 98 Always Always blocks Assertions When using fine grained analysis vsim capacity this entry expands and provides information for each assertion Blocks Classes When using fine grained analysis vsim capacity this entry expands and provides information for each class Continuous assignment Covergroups Function instances Initial Initial blocks Module instances Nets Parameters QDAs When using fine grained analysis vsim capacity this entry expands and provides information for Queues Dynamic Arrays and As
179. es Dialog Box which allows you to create a ranking results file based on the selected UCDB files Refer to the section Ranking Coverage Test Data for more information HTML Report Displays the HTML Coverage Report Dialog Box which allows you to view your coverage statistics in an HTML viewer Command Execution Allows you to re run simulations based on the resultant UCDB file based on the simulation settings to create the file You can rerun any test whose test record appears in an individual ucdb file a merged ucdb file or ranking results rank file See Test Attribute Records in the UCDB for more information on test records Setup Displays the Command Setup Dialog box which allows you to create and edit your own setups which can be used to control the execution of commands Restore All Defaults removes any changes you make to the list of setups and the associated commands Execute on all Executes the specified command s on all ucdb files in the browser through TestReRun even those used in merged ucdb files and rank files Execute on selected Executes the specified command s on the selected ucdb file s through TestReRun Filter Either opens the Filter Setup Dialog Box or applies desired filter setups Setup opens the Filter Setup dialog that allows you to save and edit filters to apply to the data Create button opens the Create Filter dialog which allows you to select filter
180. es the amount of information drawn in the window and eases your FSM debugging tasks Figure 4 20 shows two versions of the same FSM The top image shows all of the transitions and the bottom image combines the common conditions rst into a single transition as referenced by the gray diamond placeholder You control the level of detail for transitions with the FSM View gt Transitions to reset menu items ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 137 Window Reference FSM Viewer Window Figure 4 20 Combining Common Transition Conditions s simifrice thicelvin ifpresent state HA Tran 0 gt SO FSM View gt Rand frst Transitions to Reset gt AN Tran S2 gt SO i i i Cond irst a Hs Cond2 1 Noy Tran Dgo A Cond ret All N Tran S0 gt S1 Cong 1 a Tran 51 7 a2 Cond fscn 1 EA iial N J 4 Im gdm rics borcalyini l oresenk_skate Fee HA FSM View gt o b Transitions to Reset gt os Cond rst Combine Common Conditions ES Tran 52 gt 50 Cond 1 iN f Ton E A Tran 80 51 Cond ffscnt 16 A oval Cond Cond ffscnt 16 bef lidral 138 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference FSM Viewer Window GUI Elements of the FSM Viewer Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Table 4 26 FSM Viewer Window Graphical Elements Blue state bubble
181. es which type enumerations map into LOGIC This mapping is used for vectors only scalars i LOGIC 7 TF Specifies which type enumerations map into LOGIC_Z This mapping is used for vectors only scalars i tocals HLogicStyleTable yi LOGIC_0 Solid gold 0 Controls how signals of LOGIC_O type are displayed in the Wave window The three items determine LOGIC_1 Solid gold 2 Controls how signals of LOGIC_1 type are displayed in the Wave window The three items determine xj dow The three items determin F LOGIC_DC DoubleDash blue 1 Change LogicStyleTable Preference Value LOGIC_H DoubleDash grey93 ow The three items determine LOGIC_L DoubleDash grey9 New value for ow The three items determine LOGIC _U Solid red 1 LogicStyleTable LOGIC_1 ow The three items determine LOGIC W DoubleDiash red 1 Solid gold A How The three items determine LOGIC X Solid red 1 Controls how signals of LOGIC_1 type are displayed in the ow The three items determine LOGIC 7 Solid blue 1 Wave window The three items determine line type line color ile hetee i and line vertical position For vertical position 0 is at the Main bottom of the waveform 1is at the middle and 2 is at the Memory top tange of values Solid OnOfDash Doubledash color Objects name or hex value 0 1 2 Postscript OK Cancel JEE Expand All Collapse All Find Change Value Reset Defaults OK Apply Cancel ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manua
182. esired command When a unique command has been entered the command usage is presented in the drop down box Associate files types such as v sv vhd do with the product These associations are typically made upon install but this option allows you to update your system in case changes have been made since installation Open the HTML based portal for all PDF and HTML documentation Open the PDF based portal for the most commonly used PDF documents Open the Tcl command reference man pages in Windows help format Tcl Syntax Open the Tcl syntax documentation in your web browser Tcl Man pages Open the Tcl Tk manual in your web browser Open a technical note in the ModelSim Notepad editor ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 51 Menus Help Menu 52 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Chapter 3 Toolbars The Main window contains a toolbar frame that displays context specific toolbars The following sections describe the toolbars and their associated buttons You can determine the name of a toolbar in the GUI by right clicking on the toolbar and looking for the bolded name in the pop up menu ATV Toolbar The ATV toolbar allows you to control aspects of the Assertion Thread Viewer Figure 3 1 ATV Toolbar CELEO Table 3 1 ATV Toolbar Buttons M Menu ATV gt View Grid Ascending Menu ATV gt Ascending Expressions Expressions Annotate Menu ATV gt Annotate Local Vars Local Vars
183. esponds to the file resulting from the write list command There is a column for delta time and each delta time step value is shown on a separate line along with the final value for each signal for that delta time step Figure 4 29 List Window After write list delta all Option is Used a list ney ftopll inply delta topili routpl topll inpe topli foutpe T 20 20 14 14 10 4 20 5 14 10 ites d e ai 10 4 4 5E aU et Bratt a eae 4 lines El o y list eri Figure 4 30 shows the appearance of the List window after the configure list delta events command is used It corresponds to the file resulting from the write list command There is a column for event time and each event time step value is shown on a separate line along with the final value for each signal for that event time step Since each event corresponds to a new event time step only one signal will change values between two consecutive lines 154 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference List Window Figure 4 30 List Window After write list event Option is Used Fl list 7 x ney topll inpl k event ftopll foutpl ftopll inpe topll foutpe 20 P 7 7 SE a 14 20 14 14 5 14 5 Searching in the List Window The List window provides two methods for locating objects 1 Finding signal names o Select Edit gt Find o Click the Find toolbar button binoculars icon o use the find command T
184. est_smysm_seqoOy sm Module 25 oe af oftest_sm srarn_O beh_sram Module 6 5 Instance Coverage Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Instance Coverage window Setting a Coverage Threshold You can specify a percentage above or below which you don t want to see coverage statistics For example you might set a threshold of 85 such that only objects with coverage below that percentage are displayed Anything above that percentage 1s filtered Procedure 1 Right click any object in the Instance Coverage window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 142 Window Reference Instance Coverage Window 2 Select Set filter The Filter instance list dialog appears as in Figure 4 22 Figure 4 22 Filter Instance List Dialog Box Filter Instance List i x Filter Method Code Coverage Type C Wo filtering M Statement Filter above threshold W Branch Filter below threshold W Condition we Expression M Toggle I FSM Threshold Level ai GUI Elements of the Instance Coverage Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Column Descriptions The table below lists columns in the Instance Coverage window with a description of their contents Table 4 29 Table 4 29 Columns in the Instance Coverage Window Column name Description the number of hits from the total number of assertions as a percentage Assertion graph a bar chart displaying t
185. estions dialog box used for saving and managing specific queries of the data Filter Expressions Opens Filter Expressions dialog used for saving and managing filters Hierarchy Configurations Opens Hierarchy Configurations dialog box used for saving and managing particular hierarchy configurations of the data Column Layouts Opens Configure Column Layout dialog used for creating editing and managing the configuration of columns Show Titles in Hier Toggles on and off showing the titles within the hierarchy column Column Global Options Configures how when Message Viewer opens Edit Transforms Opens a dialog which will open a transform rules file for editing with the Transform Rule File Editor Load Save Setup File Loads Saves a particular setup to a name you specify Expand Collapse Manipulates the expansion of the Messages column Selected All Related GUI Features e The Messages Bar in the Wave window provides indicators as to when a message occurred ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 187 Window Reference Message Viewer Window Message Viewer Display Options Dialog Box This dialog box allows you to control display options for the message viewer tab of the transcript window Hierarchy Selection This field allows you to control the appearance of message hierarchy if any Display with Hierarchy enables or disables a hierarchical view of messages First by Then by specifies the organizatio
186. et for a single signal select View gt Signal Properties from the List window menu bar when the window is undocked and select the Triggers line setting Individual signal settings override global settings 162 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Figure 4 37 Line Triggering in the List Window List Signal Properties Signal test_counter caunt Dicplay Harme counter ao eeeenne o m 2 C Does not trigger line Window Reference List Window To modify new line triggering for the whole simulation select Tools gt List Preferences from the List window menu bar when the window is undocked or use the configure command When you select Tools gt List Preferences the Modify Display Properties dialog appears ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 163 Window Reference List Window Figure 4 38 Setting Trigger Properties Modify Display Properties list R Oj x Deltas Expand Deltas Collapse Deltas No Deltas Trigger On MW Signal Change Strobe Pernod 0 ne First Strobe at fo Kg Strobe Trigger Gating Use Gating Expression Use Expression Builder Expression On Duration fo ng OF Cancel Apply The following table summaries the triggering options Table 4 34 Triggering Options Deltas Choose between displaying all deltas Expand Deltas displaying the value at the final delta Collapse Delta You can also hide the delta co
187. eview Sample Text 012345678946CDEFUW x22 The Quick Brown Fox Jumped Over The Lazy Dog Table 7 1 Global Fonts fixedFont for all text in Source window and Notepad display and in all text entry fields or boxes footerFont for all footer text that appears in footer of Main window and all undocked windows textFont for Transcript window text and text in list boxes treeFont for all text that appears in any window that displays a hierarchical tree The By Name tab lists every Tcl variable in a tree structure The procedure for changing a Tcl variable is 1 Expand the tree 2 Highlight a variable 3 Click Change Value to edit the current value Clicking OK or Apply at the bottom of the Preferences dialog changes the variable and the change is saved when you exit ModelSim You can search for information in the By Name tab by using the the Find button However the Find button will only search expanded preference items therefore it is suggested that you click the Expand All button before searching within this tab Setting Preference Variables from the Command Line Use the Tcl set Command Syntax to customize preference variables from the Main window command line For example set lt variable name gt lt variable value gt ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 307 GUI Preferences Simulator GUI Preferences Saving GUI Preferences GUI preferences are saved automatically when you exit the tool If you prefer to st
188. f the active Cursor cursor Collapse All Menu Wave gt Expanded collapses simulation time over aa Time Time gt Collapse All entire simulation time range Collapse Menu Wave gt Expanded collapses simulation time at Time at Time gt Collapse Cursor the simulation time of the Active active cursor Cursor Zoom Toolbar The Zoom toolbar allows you to change the view of the Wave window Figure 3 29 Zoom Toolbar RELEE ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 79 Toolbars Tabbed Toolbars Table 3 27 Zoom Toolbar Buttons Zoom In Menu Wave gt Zoom gt CH Zoom In Hotkey 1 I or Zoom Out Menu Wave gt Zoom gt Zoom Out Hotkey o O or Zoom Full Menu Wave gt Zoom gt Zoom Full Hotkey f or F Zoom in Menu Wave gt Zoom gt on Active Zoom Cursor Cursor Hotkey c or C Cursors Zoom Other Window ne Tabbed Toolbars Zooms in by a factor of 2x Zooms out by a factor of 2x Zooms to show the full length of the simulation Zooms in by a factor of 2x centered on the active cursor Zooms in or out to show the range between the last two selected cursors Changes the view in additional instances of the Wave window to match the view of the active Wave window You can use an alternative GUI format when working with ModelSim Toolbars Where the default format is to display every active toolbar in multiple rows above the window portion of the GUI Tabbed Toolbars present a sin
189. finition of the signal Figure 4 89 drivers Command Results in Transcript Transcript SEE Ex few Es SIM 26 gt drivers top dut enable Drivers for top dut enable atl Wet top dut enable Stl Driver top dut 2 TOTT IIT GOEG anal laL Mi Op dub IMPLICIT Wikketfenable 1 View Declaration SIM 27 gt Now 170 170ns Deters Add ta List Mow 170 170 ns Delta 3 adra ena Add bo wave Add to Dataflow Copy ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 257 Window Reference Transcript Window Using Transcript Menu Items When the Transcript window is active a Transcript menu selection appears in the Main window menu bar The following items may be selected when you open the Transcript menu Adjust Font Scaling Displays the Adjust Scaling dialog box which allows you to adjust how fonts appear for your display environment Directions are available in the dialog box Transcript File Allows you to change the default name used when saving the transcript file The saved transcript file will contain all the text in the current transcript file Command History Allows you to change the default name used when saving command history information This file is saved at the same time as the transcript file Save File Allows you to change the default name used when selecting File gt Save AS Saved Lines Allows you to change how many lines of text are saved in the transcript window
190. g Object Values and Descriptions 0 0 0 eens 235 Marking Lines with Bookmarks 0 0 0c ccc eee een e eens 236 Performing Incremental Search for Specific Code 2 eee eee 236 Customizing the Source WindoW 1 0 0 eee ee een ees 237 SUUCIULe WINdoOW 2 cackeceteacseends caeenededetwents Gade ARARA Ga eters 239 Viewing the Structure Window cc ccc eenn neee 239 Structure Window Tasks 0 00 enn e eens 240 GUI Elements of the Structure Window 0 0 ee tenes 244 Code Coverage in the Structure WindoW 0 0 cee tenes 251 Transaction View Window 2 ccc cc eee ee eddie inanis ees 253 Transcript Window o2 lt 42e4deeencecaghegc dea gneaseeagaegsdecgmeasceeaeaees ces 254 Displaying the Transcript Window 0 cee eee eens 254 Viewing Data in the Transcript Window 0 0 ccc eee ees 254 Saving the Transcript File 2 ee eee eee ees 254 Coloring the TransciipPi csccaarceceetargaeeqadeyeeeetareeieeader ane etaese 255 Disabling Creation of the Transcript File 0 0 ce ee eee 256 Performing an Incremental Search 0 0 ccc eee ene e ees 256 Using Automatic Command Help 0 0 0 0 ene eas 251 Using drivers and Readers Command Results 0 00 297 Using Transcript Menu Items 0 0 2 0 0 anae 258 Verification Management Browser Window 0 000 cece eee eee eens 259 Verification Browser Window Tasks 0 ccc ce
191. gle row of buttons grouped into common tasks such as editing debugging coverage and so forth The buttons are context driven and either operative or greyed out depending on which window is currently active space available When this happens an Overflow button appears on the right edge of the As the width of the GUI changes the buttons on a toolbar may not be able to fit in the i Tabbed Toolbar Clicking the Overflow icon opens an Overflow Menu Figure 3 30 which displays the remaining buttons 80 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Tabbed Toolbars Figure 3 30 Tabbed Toolbars and Overflow Menu ioj xi Fie Edit View Compie Simulate Add Transcript Tools Layout Bookmarks Window Help Home Edit Compile Coverage Simulate Debug Profile Source Dataflow Layout eae Bo 3 e Add Contributing Signals v Expanded Time Off J Expanded Time Deltas Mode Jj Expanded Time Events Mode E Expand All Time _ Expand Time At Active Cursor _ Collapse All Time _ Collapse Time At Active Cursor JA Find first difference M 0 vo You can turn on the Tabbed Toolbars GUI by setting the PrefToolbar newEnabled preference variable to and then restarting ModelSim Window Specific Buttons Buttons that function only in a specific window are available in a bar at the top of the window To display the window specific buttons click the Show Hide Toolbar button in the window title bar Figure
192. gous to cursors in the Wave window You can add delete and move markers in the List window similarly to the Wave window You will notice two different types of markers Active Marker The most recently selected marker shows as a black highlight Non active Marker Any markers you have added that are not active are shown with a green border You can manipulate the markers in the following ways Setting a marker When you click in the right hand portion of the List window you will highlight a given time black horizontal highlight and a given signal or object green vertical highlight Moving the active marker List window markers behave the same as Wave window cursors There is one active marker which is where you click along with inactive markers generated by the Add Marker command Markers move based on where you click The closest marker either active or inactive will become the active marker and the others remain inactive Adding a marker You can add an additional marker to the List window by right clicking at a location in the right hand side and selecting Add Marker Deleting a marker You can delete a marker by right clicking in the List window and selecting Delete Marker The marker closest to where you clicked is the marker that will be deleted Popup Menu Right click in the right hand pane to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 35 List Window Popup Menu Popup M
193. gure 4 63 The dialog is the same when the Full view is active and Schematic gt Preferences is selected only the title is changed Figure 4 63 Incremental Schematic Options Dialog Incremental Schematic Options x Show M Instance names Design Unitnames M Current Time label M Busripper indices Signal values M Redundant buffers Netnamesat Wire Corner t Expansion Indude control logic Max gate limit 1024 Max hierarchy limit 32 scellaneous M Keep 5chematic content Log nets M Mouse over net highlighting M Bottom inout pins M Select environment M Use Code Previewer window Disable sprout lf Automatic add to Wave Y Allow use of vertical text Select equivalentnets V Enable tooltip popups Warnings M Enable diverging X fanin warning M Enable depth limit warning if Enable X event at time 0 warning M Enable Add Schematic warning The Show section of the dialog provides the following options when the boxes are checked Instance names Show instance names for architectures modules processes etc Bus ripper indices Show ripper indices for busses Pin names Show pin names in the architectures modules processes etc 210 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Schematic Window Design Unit names Show design unit names for architectures modules processes etc Signal values Show signal values annotated onto the nets Signal values are
194. h the vsim command The syntax 1s vsim displaymsgmode both tran wlf You can also use the displaymsgmode variable in the modelsim ini file The message transcribing methods that are controlled by displaymsgmode include Verilog Display System Tasks write display monitor and strobe The following also apply if they are sent to STDOUT fwrite fdisplay fmonitor and fstrobe FLI Print Function Calls mti_PrintFormatted and mti_PrintMessage PLI Print Function Calls 10_printf and vpi_printt SystemC Macros SC_REPORT_INFO SC_REPORT_WARNING SC_REPORT_ ERROR and SC_REPORT_ FATAL e msgmode messages All elaboration and runtime messages not part of the displaymsgmode messages By default these messages are written only to the transcript To change this default behavior you can use the msgmode argument with the vsim command The syntax is vsim msgmode both tran wlf ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 182 Window Reference Message Viewer Window To write messages to the WLF file and transcript which provides access to the messages through the Message Viewer window you can also use the msgmode variable in the modelsim ini file Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Message Viewer and select a loaded WLF dataset for viewing Command view msgviewer lt dataset gt wlf Figure 4 45 Message Viewer Window Message viewer H 7 Me
195. he Assertion if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Assertion hits Assertion hits shows different counts based on whether the assertdebug is used with assertdebug argument to vsim command number of assertions whose pass count is greater than 0 and fail count is equal to 0 e without assertdebug number of assertions whose fail count is equal to 0 Assertion misses the number of assertions whose fail counts are greater than 0 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 143 Window Reference Instance Coverage Window Table 4 29 Columns in the Instance Coverage Window cont the current ratio of Branch hits to Branch count Branch count Files window the number of executable branches in each file Structure window the number of executable branches in each level and all levels under that level Branch graph a bar chart displaying the Branch if the percentage 1s below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Branches hit the number of executable branches that have been executed in the current simulation Branches missed the number of executable branches that were not executed in the current simulation Cover the number of hits from the total number of cover directives as a per
196. he first two of these options will open a Find mode toolbar at the bottom of the List window By default the Search For option is set to Name For more information see Find and Filter Functions 2 Search for values or transitions o Select Edit gt Signal Search o Click the Find toolbar button binoculars icon and select Search For gt Value from the Find toolbar that appears at the bottom of the List window o use the search command Searching for Values or Transitions The search command lets you search for values of selected signals When you select Edit gt Signal Search the List Signal Search dialog Figure 4 31 appears ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 155 Window Reference List Window Figure 4 31 Wave Signal Search Dialog Box List Signal Search window List _ x Any Transition Falling Edge Search for Signal Value Value Search for Expression Expression Builder Search and Match Count Options Search until END of data Stop after p match s Search until time Ignore glitches I Move active marker to location of match Search Results Status No matches between start end times Time One option of note is Search for Expression The expression can involve more than one signal but is limited to signals currently in the window Expressions can include constants variables and DO files Refer to Expression Syntax for more informati
197. he following keys when the mouse cursor is within the List window will cause the indicated actions Table 5 3 List Window Keyboard Shortcuts Left Arrow scroll listing left selects and highlights the item to the left of the currently selected item Right Arrow scroll listing right selects and highlights the item to the right of the currently selected item Up Arrow scroll listing up Down Arrow scroll listing down Page Up scroll listing up by page Ctrl Up Arrow Page Down scroll listing down by page Ctrl Down Arrow Tab searches forward down to the next transition on the selected signal Shift Tab searches backward up to the previous transition on the selected signal Shift Left Arrow extends selection left right Shift Right Arrow Ctrl f Windows opens the Find dialog box to find the specified item Ctrl s UNIX label within the list display Wave Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts The following mouse actions and keystrokes can be used in the Wave window Table 5 4 Wave Window Mouse Shortcuts Ctrl Click left mouse button zoom area in and drag Ctrl Click left mouse button zoom out and drag A ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 289 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions Wave Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts Table 5 4 Wave Window Mouse Shortcuts cont Ctrl Click left mouse button zoom fit and drag x Click left mouse button and drag Ctrl Click left mouse button on
198. he popup context menu When you set a process as the next active process you will see Next Active in the Order column of that process Figure 4 53 Figure 4 53 Next Active Process Displayed in Order Column Process Design H7 x Ce Type fitered 5 Parent Path O FOL OY SESS Always Ready 3 Ee FOLWaAYS 1SS Always Ready 2l Next Active topic INITIGL 69 Initial Active 1 itopip FASSIGN 25 Assign wait itopip FASSIGN 4 Assign wait itopip ASSIGN 23 i Wait itopip A55TGN 21 i Wait itopicis3 Creating Textual Process Report You can create a textual report of all processes by using the process report command Figure 4 54 Sample Process Report in the Transcript Window Transcript view Mode active Visible Types noimplprirn Visible States all Sort Mode order Fullpath Active 1 topipi IMITIAL 69 Ready fhop chal yay sat 155 Ready 3 hop rial ay Sass f Transcript alal 198 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Processes Window GUI Elements of the Processes Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Column Descriptions Table 4 50 Processes Window Column Descriptions Class Info System Verilog class object id or UVM component name Execution order of all processes in the Active and Ready states Refer to the section Process Order Description for more information Parent Path Hierarchical parent p
199. hich it is saved By default the HTML file is saved into the current directory GUI Elements of the Verification Browser Window This section provides an overview of the GUI elements specific to this window 260 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Verification Management Browser Window Column Descriptions For a description of the columns ending in Incr see the generic description for xxxIncr Table 4 57 Verification Management Browser Window Column Descriptions Assertions the number of hits from the total number of assertions as a percentage valid only for rows within a rank file whose tests contribute in some measure to the overall coverage Within those rows the numbers indicate the incremental additional coverage contributed by the test in that row relative to the previous test s coverage Branches the number of executable branches in each level and all levels under that level Compulsory whether the UCDB is part of a required compulsory test for ranking Covergroups the number of hits from the total number of covergroups as a percentage Covers the number of hits from the total number of cover directives as a percentage CPUTime total CPU time consumed CvgPeakMemory the peak transient memory used by the covergroup CvgPeakTime the simulation run time at which the peak transient memory usage occurred CvgTotalMemory the persistent memory used by the covergroup Date date
200. i chiimi immediate DYA on U A Aest ail ch gend 0 Concurrent aA on 0 j A Aestailchl gend O fa Concurrent PL on 0 A Aestbiz ch vim immediate cyt on 0 Aestbi2 ch gent 0 a Concurrent oy on 0 A Atestbi2tch1 gend O a Concurrent Pol on 0 es OOOO _ aapea o Assertions Window Tasks Refer to the section Viewing Assertions in the Assertions Window for more information GUI Elements of the Assertions Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Column Descriptions Table 4 2 Assertions Window Columns Active Count The number of active assertion attempts at the current time Only enabled if the simulator is invoked with the assertdebug option or the ini file variable AutoExclusionsDisable is set to 1 Assertion Expression Displays the actual assertion expression ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 86 Window Reference Assertions Window Table 4 2 Assertions Window Columns cont Assertion Type Indicates the assertion type Immediate or Concurrent Attempt Count The number of times the assertion has been attempted This is the number of assertion clocks for clocked assertions or the number of passes and fails for unclocked assertions This column is populated when you specify assertcover or assertdebug for vsim or if either the AssertionCover or AssertionDebug ini file variable is set to 1 ATV Indicates the status of assertion thread
201. ide at Mentor Graphics request Customer shall make records available in electronic format and shall fully cooperate with data gathering to support the license review Mentor Graphics shall bear the expense of any such review unless a material non compliance is revealed Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all information gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights under this Agreement The provisions of this Section 16 shall survive the termination of this Agreement CONTROLLING LAW JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION The owners of certain Mentor Graphics intellectual property licensed under this Agreement are located in Ireland and the U S To promote consistency around the world disputes shall be resolved as follows excluding conflict of laws rules this Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of Oregon U S if Customer is located in North or South America and the laws of Ireland if 18 19 Customer is located outside of North or South America All disputes arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Portland Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply or Dublin Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply Notwithstanding the foregoing all disputes in Asia arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration i
202. ign Unit Match Case search must match the case of the text Aa entered in the Find field Exact whole word searches for whole words that match ay those entered in the Find field B Regular Expression Searches for a regular expression S Source window only Search For ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 27 Overview General GUI Tasks Table 1 2 Graphic Elements of Toolbar in Find Mode cont Wrap Search Searches from cursor to bottom of mit window then continues search from top of the window Searching in the Structure Window The Structure window Find bar supports hierarchical searching to limit the regions of a search A forward slash character is used to separate the search words A double slash is used to specify a recursive search from the double slash down the hierarchy Figure 1 10 Refer to Finding Items in the Structure Window for more information Figure 1 10 Find Mode Popup Displaying Matches PPA AE revert A a ae rt 6UFIF141 proc fast Process acc lt g ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt R Search results 8 found top p 10 BUF 24 top p 11 BUFs47 top p 11 FORF46 top p 11 BUF 45 top p 11 BUF 44 top p i2 BUFS24 top p NORs49 ftop p ASSIGN 24 xIFind Hf top 4 eP SearchFor
203. ignals from the window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 269 Window Reference Watch Window Watch Menu This menu becomes available in the Main menu when the Watch window 1s active Table 4 61 Watch Window Menu Popup menu Tiem Opens the Force Selected Signal dialog box which allows you to force the signal to given value Refer to the force command for details about the options NoForce Removes the force on the selected object Refer to the noforce command Clock Performs actions related to the force command with the repeat argument Change Performs actions related to the change command Follow Selection Context Changes the current context in the Structure window Save Format Saves a new or loads an existing do file Load Format containing add watch commands to recreate the Watch window Group Groups several selected signals into a single item UnGroup Breaks a previously created group back into its individual signals Tile Reorganizes the items in the Watch window into different tiled formats Delete Item Removes the selected signal from the window You can alternatively use the delete key Clear All Removes all signals from the window 2 0 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c l The Wave window like the List window allows you to view the results of your simulation In the Wave window however you can see the results as waveforms and their values Figure 4 94 Wave Window EE Wa
204. in non optimized mode or set acc arguments to enable you to set breakpoints in the design See Preserving Object Visibility for Debugging Purposes and Design Object Visibility for Designs with PLI To delete the breakpoint completely right click the red breakpoint marker and select Remove Breakpoint Other options on the context menu include Disable Breakpoint Deactivate the selected breakpoint Edit Breakpoint Open the File Breakpoint dialog to change breakpoint arguments Edit All Breakpoints Open the Modify Breakpoints dialog Run Until Here Run the simulation from the current simulation time up to the specified line of code Refer to Run Until Here for more information Add Remove Bookmark Add or remove a file line bookmark Adding File Line Breakpoints with the bp Command Use the bp command to add a file line breakpoint from the VSIM gt prompt For example 230 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window bp top vhd 147 sets a breakpoint in the source file top vhd at line 147 Editing File Line Breakpoints To modify or add a breakpoint according to the line number in a source file do any one of the following Select Tools gt Breakpoints from the Main menu e Right click a breakpoint and select Edit All Breakpoints from the popup menu e Click the Edit Breakpoints toolbar button See Simulate Toolbar This displays the Modify Breakpoints dialog box shown
205. ind Least Coverage Find Most Coverage Find Zero Coverage Find Non Zero Coverage Summary copies selected item s to clipboard Expand All expands all items displayed in window Collapse All collapses all items displayed in window Viewing Code Coverage Data and Current Exclusions To view executed or missed statements branches conditions expressions or FSMs as well as items excluded from coverage do the following 1 Select a file in the Files window or an instance or design unit in the Structure window whose coverage you wish to analyze 2 With the Code Coverage Analysis window active select the type of coverage to view Branch Analysis Condition analysis etc from the pulldown menu in the Analysis toolbar Figure 4 8 108 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Code Coverage Analysis Window Figure 4 9 Missed Coverage in Code Coverage Analysis Windows Coverage Analysis Branch Analysis by instance ptb _gctesti_qctest topi_gctest_z56ki_gchipi_gpadlesssi_egctl Kp 183 Wa 192 aoe 194 x x x x x 7 203 Wa 208 Wi 219 Wi 231 Le 237 Ke 240 Ke 245 Wa 251 Wi 253 Wi 299 Pa 301 Wi 307 GET 2ND SIM begin case eq dmode PAI OPT PAl OPTI PS3 OPT E ND E ND2 begin 194 PAL OPT 194 PAL OPTI 194 PS3 OPT 194 E NOD 194 E NDZ if QFULL Dj begin end else begin GET 42ND CF begin WAIT OF begin 1f QFULL D begin end else begin WAIT EB begin 1f ECF TGNT begin e
206. indow 285 in the Source window 285 EOS Note column assertion directives 87 Expanded Time viewing in List window 153 Expression Builder 156 configuring a List trigger with 165 saving expressions to Tcl variable 158 Expressions ascending descending 53 SN e F8 function key 287 File line breakpoints 229 edit 231 Files window 129 251 Filter 28 assertions 244 subprograms 244 Filtering Contains field 25 29 signals in Objects window 191 Find 25 in Structure window 242 inline search bar 236 256 prefill text entry field 26 Fixed point radix 302 FocusFollowsMouse 18 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY2Z Fonts scaling 25 fonts setting preferences 306 Format saving restoring 24 162 signal Wave window 274 Format file Wave window 161 Function call debugging 95 QG Global GUI changes fonts 306 Global signal radix 191 273 302 Glob style 29 Graphic symbols ATV window 93 Grid ATV window 53 GUI preferences fonts 306 GUI_expression_format GUI expression builder 156 H Help command help 257 Highlighting in Source window 237 Highlights in Source window 219 Hypertext link 215 m o Icons shapes and meanings 37 window based 278 incremental xxxIncr coverage in Browser columns 261 Incremental view click and sprout 206 schematic window adding objects 208 inline search bar 236 256 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual
207. indow Tasks nnnnnaannnnn nunne e enne 196 GUI Elements of the Processes Window 0 ec cece eens 199 Prone WiNKOWS 2246658044 d5oeeoeeeneonsSagaeeeaaeeueons Gaga eeeaarawes E 201 GUI Elements of the Profile Windows 0 000s 203 NCMeMIAtIC WIMIOW caganeodeaeessaeoaeamadeoaeudeateaeemne dep euseeseseena ds 206 Schematic Window Tasks 0 0 eee eee ee eens 207 GUI Elements of the Schematic Window 0 0 0 0 0 ccc een ees 212 NOULCE WANUOW s2scenarsacchuanse dceaagwos oye nnaesceaagewn oyouenie EEEE E 215 PEM Source Files ic de oc te as Se Sea BAS As he See ee eae ae ae 216 Displaying Multiple Source Files 2 0 0 0 eee eens 216 Dragging and Dropping Objects into the Wave and List Windows 217 Setting your Context by Navigating Source Files 0 0 0 0 eens 217 Coverage Data in the Source Window 0 cc ccc eee eens 220 Debugging with Source Annotation 0 000 eee eee eens 223 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 5 Table of Contents Accessing Textual Connectivity Information 0 cece eee eens 229 Language Templates 0 0 eee eee eee nee e nes 226 Setting File Line Breakpoints with the GUI 0 0 0 0 0 0 es 229 Adding File Line Breakpoints with the bp Command 00 0 eee 230 Editing File Line Breakpoints 0 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ene e eens 231 Setting Conditional Breakpoints 0 0 0 nee een ees 299 Checkin
208. ing Source Window 238 Figure 4 82 Structure Window 2 ee ene ees 240 Figure 4 83 Find Mode Popup Displays Matches 0 0 243 Figure 4 84 Change Top Level Category Expansion 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 250 Figure 4 85 Change Default Ordering of Structure Window 00000 2931 Figure 4 86 Code Coverage Data in the Structure Window 000 eee 251 Figure 4 87 Changing the colorizeTranscript Preference Value 256 Figure 4 88 Transcript Window with Find Toolbar 0 0 0 eee eee eee 257 Figure 4 89 drivers Command Results in Transcript 0 0 0 0 257 Figure 4 90 Browser Tab 0 0 0 0 0 259 Figure 4 91 Watch WINGOW sn onceeuneouge Pendens oe undai ana a E es 266 Figure 4 92 Expanded Array 0 0 ccc ee eee ees 267 Figure 4 93 Scrollable Hierarchical Display 20 268 Figure 4 94 Wave Window cece eee eee eee eee 271 Figure 4 95 Pathnames Pane 0 0 0 eee eens 273 Figure 4 96 Setting the Global Signal Radix from the Wave Window 274 Figure 4 97 Values PAINS ei ss cre 6 oid e picquoreds Sulhoreh Gia tay Goihexe Giaquinee Gulheensh Gas dolar Gedid sagence Sulbewsh 274 Figure 4 98 Wavelom Paneo e 4 4 2404 a t E eE OES he eee e ES 213 Figure 4 99 Analog Sidebar Toolbox 0 2 nnee 213 Ficure 4 100 Cursor Panes os4ns 6 ota eee nee b ects E E E E EE iS 276
209. ing criteria and select the tests for application of the specified filters e Apply applies the selected filter s on the data ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 263 Window Reference Verification Management Browser Window Table 4 58 Verification Browser View Menu cont Browser View Menu Description Item Generate RMDB File Generates Verification Run Management configuration file rmdb including selected tests or all tests in the directory Selecting either option brings up a dialog to enter the name to be used for the rmdb file Save Selected Tests Saves selected tests into a rmdb or tcl file to be executed by vrun command Save All Tests Saves all tests in the directory into a rmdb or tcl file to be executed by vrun command Show Full Path 264 Trend Analysis Toggles whether the FileName column shows only the filename or its full path Controls the decimal point precision of the data in the Verification Browser window Active only when a Trend UCDB 1s selected or when multiple UCDBs are selected Allows access to trending functionality HTML Report opens the Coverage Trend Report HTML dialog box where you set the HTML report s colorization threshold the output directory path and other HTML reporting options See vcover report html for detailed description of options XML Report opens the Coverage Trend Report XML dialog box where you set whether you are r
210. ion in which the transaction stream occurs dark blue for VHDL light blue for Verilog and SystemVerilog green for SystemC Window Time Display There are two basic time designations used to control display of object values in many simulator windows e Now The end of simulation time or the time at which the simulation has stopped Current Time The current time displayed in an open window The time may be any time between O and the end of simulation and is set in several ways o by moving a wave cursor o by executing a causality trace that traces back through simulation time to find an event o by interacting with the Current Time Label Refer to Current Time Label for more information A number of windows are dynamically linked to update when the time setting in one is changed The windows include the Dataflow FSM Objects Schematic Source and Watch windows 38 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General Visual Elements Current Time Label The Current Time Label allows you to interact with and change the simulation time displayed in several windows The Current Time Label displays the Now end of simulation or Current Time and allows you to search the time line for a transition on a selected object in the window Figure 1 20 Figure 1 20 Current Time Label Minimize Maximize Button 1 5275 ns b When you run a simulation and it comes to an end the Current Time Label displays
211. ions are defined for the FSM Viewer The mouse wheel performs zoom amp center operations on the diagram o Mouse wheel up zoom out o Mouse wheel down zoom in Whether zooming in or out the view will re center towards the mouse location Left mouse button click and drag to move the view of the FSM Middle mouse button click and drag to perform the following stroke actions o Up and left Zoom Full o Up and right Zoom Out The amount is determined by the distance dragged o Down and right Zoom In on the area of the bounding box Using the Keyboard in the FSM Viewer These keyboard operations are defined for the FSM Viewer e Arrow Keys scrolls the window in the specified direction o Unmodified scrolls by a small amount o Ctrl lt arrow key gt scrolls by a larger amount o Shift lt arrow key gt shifts the view to the edge of the display Exporting the FSM Viewer Window as an Image Save the FSM view as an image for use in other applications 1 Select the FSM Viewer window 2 Export to one of the following formats o Postscript File gt Print Postscript o Bitmap bmp File gt Export gt Image JPEG jpg PNG png GIF gif 136 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference FSM Viewer Window Combining Common Transitions to Reset By default the FSM Viewer window combines transitions to reset that are based upon common conditions This reduc
212. ions on the timeline You can link cursors so that they move across the timeline together See Linking Cursors in the Waveform Analysis chapter Figure 4 100 Cursor Pane i Now ee Cursor 1 2 0 ns ae Vas Cursor 2 6 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Wave Window On the left side of this pane is a group of icons called the Cursor and Timeline Toolbox see Working with Cursors This toolbox gives you quick access to cursor and timeline features and configurations See Measuring Time with Cursors in the Wave Window for more information Messages Bar The messages bar located at the top of the Wave window contains indicators pointing to the times at which a message was output from the simulator By default the indicators are not displayed To turn on message indicators use the msgmode argument with the vsim command or use the msgmode variable in the modelsim ini file Figure 4 101 Wave Window Message Bar EE Wave The message indicators the down pointing arrows are color coded as follows Red Indicates an assertion failure or error Yellow Indicates a warning Green Indicates a note Grey Indicates any other type of message You can use the Message bar in the following ways e Move the cursor to the next message You can do this in two ways o Click on the word Messages in the message bar to cycle the cursor to the next message after the current cursor loc
213. ist Window Column Descriptions Table 4 42 Memory List Window Columns Hierarchical name of the memory Popup Menu Right click anywhere in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 43 Memory List Popup Menu Popup Menu Ten View Contents Opens a Memory Data window for the selected memory Memory Declaration Opens a Source window to the file and line number where the memory is declared Compare Contents Allows you to compare the selected memory against another memory in the design or an external file Import Data Patterns Allows you to import data patterns into the selected memory through the Import Memory dialog box Export Data Patterns Allows you to export data patterns from the selected memory through the Export Memory dialog box 180 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Memory List Window Memory List Menu This menu becomes available in the Main menu when the Memory List window is active Table 4 44 Memories Menu Popup Menu Ten View Contents Refer to items in the Memory List Popup Menu Memory Declaration Compare Contents Import Data Patterns Export Data Patterns Expand Packed Memories Toggle the expansion of packed memories Identify Memories Within Toggle the identification of memories within Verilog Cells cells Show VHDL String as Toggle the identification of VHDL strings as Memory memories ModelSim SE GUI Refere
214. ite list events command which writes a non tabular file using a print on change format The following examples illustrate the appearance of the List window and the corresponding text file written with the write list command after various options for the configure list delta command are used Figure 4 27 shows the appearance of the List window after the configure list delta none command is used It corresponds to the file resulting from the write list command No column is shown for deltas or events Figure 4 27 List Window After configure list delta none Option is Used a list ns topll inpl topll foutpl ftopl1 onpe topll foutpe 20 20 14 14 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 153 Window Reference List Window Figure 4 28 shows the appearance of the List window after the configure list delta collapse command is used It corresponds to the file resulting from the write list command There is a column for delta time and only the final delta value and the final value for each signal for each simulation time step at which any events have occurred is shown Figure 4 28 List Window After configure list delta collapse Option is Used list ns ftopll inply delta topll foutpl ftopll inpey ftopll foutpe 0 0 20 20 14 14 10 4 4 5 amp 20 2 SURE ee eae 4 lines El P list aia Figure 4 29 shows the appearance of the List window after the configure list delta all option is used It corr
215. l v10 2c 311 GUI Preferences GUI Preference Variables Modifying Wave Window Variables from the Command Line Both the LogicStyleTable and the ListTranslateTable variables can be modified using the Tcl set command Changes are automatically saved in the preference file SHOME modelsim on UNIX Linux platforms or the Registry on Windows platforms The Tcl set command equivalent of the ListTranslateTable 1s antes Wt tem WO teen OO cen Ol antenatal ont et nS we So se set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_U Ww set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_X x r set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_0 O FALSE set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_1 1 TRUE a g set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_L set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_H set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_DC set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_Z set ListTranslateTable LOGIC_W C w w we The Tcl set command equivalent of the LogicStyleTable is set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_U Solid red i set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_X Solid red 1 set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_0 Solid green 0 set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_1 Solid green 2 Solid blue 1 set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_L DoubleDash grey90 0 set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_H DoubleDash grey90 2 set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_W DoubleDash red 1 set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_DC DoubleDash blue 1 set LogicStyleTable LOGIC_Z 312 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
216. l invocation of the Structure window sim tab Determine the default ordering of the top level categories in the Structure window To determine which category is expanded upon initial invocation do the following 1 Select Tools gt Edit Preferences from the menus This opens the Preferences window 2 Select the By Name tab in the Preferences window 3 Click the sign next to Structure to view a list of the preference variables for the Structure window 4 Click the initExpandOff variable to select it and then click the Change Value button This will open the Change Structure Preference Value dialog Figure 4 84 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 249 Window Reference Structure Window Figure 4 84 Change Top Level Category Expansion Change Structure Preference Value x New value for PrefStructure initExpandOff Top Level Categories Expand List No Expand List TB Component Package DU Instance Vedstin Statistica A list of top category names that don t expand in the initial view of the Structure window The Change Structure Preference Value dialog allows you to put a top level category in the Expand List or the No Expand List Simply click to select a category then click No Expand or Expand to move the selection into the list you want By default on the Package category is in the No Expand List To determine the default ordering of the top level categories in
217. l levels under that level that were not executed FEC UDP the current ratio of FEC UDP Expression hits to FEC UDPExpression Expression rows FEC UDP a bar chart displaying the FEC or UDP Expression if the percentage Expression graph is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable States Files window the number of states encountered in each file Structure window level States hit Files window the number of times the states were hit Structure window the number of times states in a level and each level under that level have been hit States missed Files window the number of states in a file that were not hit Structure window the number of states in a level and all levels under that level that were not hit State the current ratio of State hits to State rows State graph a bar chart displaying the State if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 247 Window Reference Structure Window Table 4 55 Columns in the Structure Window cont Column name Description Stmt count the number of executable statements in each level and all levels under that level Stmts hit the number of executable statements that were e
218. lSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Coverage Toolbar Table 3 5 Compile Toolbar Buttons Compile Command vcom or vlog Opens the Compile Source Menu Compile gt Compile Files dialog box Compile All Command vcom or vlog Compiles all files in the open Menu Compile gt Compile project all Simulate Command vsim Opens the Start Simulation Menu Simulate gt Start dialog box Simulation Break Menu Simulate gt Break Stop a compilation Ea Hotkey Break elaboration or the current simulation run Coverage Toolbar The Coverage toolbar provides tools for filtering code coverage data in the Structure and Instance Coverage windows Figure 3 6 Coverage Toolbar 4 t FD Threshold 105 a 2 xX gt Table 3 6 Coverage Toolbar Buttons L4 Enable None Enables display filtering of n Filtering coverage statistics in the Structure and Instance Coverage windows Threshold None Displays all coverage statistics i Above above the Filter Threshold for selected columns E Threshold None Displays all coverage statistics Below below the Filter Threshold for selected columns ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 57 Toolbars Dataflow Toolbar Table 3 6 Coverage Toolbar Buttons cont 100 Filter None Specifies the display coverage LU T Threshold ercentage for the selected p 8 coverage columns Statement None Applies the display filter to all Statement coverage columns in the Structure an
219. lay of hyperlinks in design source files Traces a selected wave signal from the current time back to the first sequential element See Show Cause Button for more information e Set Default Action Changes your environment up one level of hierarchy Change your environment to its previous location Change your environment forward to a previously selected environment Reload the design elements and reset the simulation time to zero with the option of maintaining various settings and objects Specify the run length for the current simulation Run the current simulation for the specified run length Continue the current simulation run until the end of the specified run length or until it hits a breakpoint or specified break event Run the current simulation forever or until it hits a breakpoint or specified break event 67 Toolbars Simulate Toolbar Table 3 18 Simulate Toolbar Buttons cont Break Menu Simulate gt Break Immediate stop of a Ea Hotkey Break compilation elaboration or simulation run Similar to hitting a breakpoint if the simulator is in the middle of a process Stop sync None Stop simulation the next time i time delta is advanced C Interrupt Command cdbg interrupt Reactivate the C debugger Menu Tools gt C Debug gt when stopped in HDL code C Interrupt Performance Menu Tools gt Profile gt Enable collection of statistical P z Profiling Performance performa
220. lbar The Help toolbar provides a way for you to search the HTML documentation for a specified string The HTML documentation will be displayed in a web browser Figure 3 9 Help Toolbar repT A Table 3 9 Help Toolbar Buttons Search None A text entry box for your Help Documentation search string Search Hotkey Enter Activates the search for the Documentation term you entered into the text entry box 60 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Layout Toolbar Layout Toolbar The Layout toolbar allows you to select a predefined or user defined layout of the graphical user interface Refer to the section Customizing the Simulator GUI Layout for more information Figure 3 10 Layout Toolbar Layout Simulate Table 3 10 Layout Toolbar Buttons Simulate ad Change Menu Layout gt A dropdown box that allows ice e Layout lt layoutName gt you to select a GUI layout e NoDesign Simulate e Coverage e VMegmt Memory Toolbar The Memory toolbar provides access to common functions Figure 3 11 Memory Toolbar m3 Goto pe lt 3 11 Memory Toolbar Buttons Porton Name __ Screen Menu Memory gt Splits the memory window Split Screen eatin Goto Address Highlights the first element of the specified address Mode Toolbar The Mode toolbar provides access to tools for controlling the mode of mouse navigation ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 61 Toolbars
221. le Mouse scroll zooms in and out e Middle mouse button strokes o Upper left zoom full o Upper right zoom out The length of the stroke changes the zoom factor o Lower right zoom area e Arrow Keys scrolls the window in the specified direction o Unmodified scrolls by a small amount o Ctrl lt arrow key gt scrolls by a larger amount o Shift lt arrow key gt shifts the view to the edge of the display GUI Elements of the Class Graph Window This section describes the GUI elements specific to the Class Graph window Popup Menu Items Table 4 10 Class Graph Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tiem Filter Controls the display of methods and properties from the class boxes View Entire Design Reloads the view to show the class hierarchy of the complete design Organize by Base Extended Class reorganizes the window so that the base or extended default classes are at the top of the hierarchy ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 101 Class Instances Window The Class Instances window shows the list of class instances and their values for a particular selected class type You may add the class items directly to the wave or list windows log them or get other information about them Accessing Menu item View gt Class Browser gt Class Instances e Command view classinstances Figure 4 6 Class Instances Window Class Instances Beta omer tency mem item JOS uym_object_stri
222. le Ranked and Profile Design Unit windows Under raw lists the raw number of Profiler samples collected during the execution of a function including all support routines under that function or the number of samples collected for an instance including all instances beneath it in the structural hierarchy 204 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Profiling Windows Table 4 51 Profile Calltree Window Column Descriptions cont Under lists the ratio as a percentage of the samples collected during the execution of a function and all support routines under that function to the total number of samples collected or the ratio of the samples collected during an instance including all instances beneath it in the structural hierarchy to the total number of samples collected ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 205 Schematic Window The Schematic window provides two views of the design a Full View which is a structural overview of the design and an Incremental View which uses Click and Sprout actions to incrementally add to the selected net s fanout The Incremental view displays the logical gate equivalent of the RTL portion of the design making it easier to understand the intent of the design For additional information please refer to the Schematic Window chapter A View indicator is displayed in the top left corner of the window Figure 4 60 You can toggle back and forth betw
223. le with the do command Export all user defined keyboard shortcuts to bindings do file Keyboard shortcuts saved in the file can be reloaded either by selecting the Import button in the Keyboard Shorcuts Dialog Box or by entering do bindings do on the command line Creating A Keyboard Shortcut You can create either a Global or a window specific shortcut 1 If you are creating a window specific shortcut the window must have been opened sometime during the simulation run 2 Open the Add Keyboard Shortcut dialog box by selecting Window gt Keyboard Shortcuts 3 Click the Add button to open the Add Keyboard Shortcut dialog box ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 283 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions User Defined Keyboard Shortcuts Figure 5 3 Add Keyboard Shortcut Dialog Box Add Keyboard Shortcut E x Note Window Shortcuts are only available when a window of the specdfied type is active They are intended for window specific commands Shortcut Key PRESS the key combination snortout Key Operation 4 Select the Shortcut Type either Global or Window If you are creating a window specific shortcut click the window button to open the Select Window Type dialog box The dialog box displays every window that has been opened during the current simulation If you do not see the window you are looking for close both dialog boxes open the window you want by entering view lt window gt on the command line or
224. les using the File gt Open command or by clicking the Open icon Alternatively you can open source files by double clicking objects in other windows For example if you double click an item in the Objects window or in the structure tab sim tab the underlying source file for the object will open in the Source window and scroll to the line where the object is defined From the command line you can use the edit command By default files you open from within the design such as when you double click an object in the Objects window open in Read Only mode To make the file editable right click in the Source window and select uncheck Read Only To change this default behavior set the PrefSource ReadOnly variable to 0 See Simulator GUI Preferences for details on setting preference variables Displaying Multiple Source Files By default each file you open or create is marked by a window tab as shown in the graphic below 216 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 66 Displaying Multiple Source Files fm C examples tutorials verilog dataflow proc v top p Default W 1 3 Drivers gt output word size 1 0 d begin end endtagsk if verbose display t Reading from addr th tin addr r gf rw r 1 strb r OF posedge clk strb r 1 posedge clk while rdy 0 posedge clk d data source File Tabs nor test2 _rw test in nand t_
225. located at http supportnet mentor com about legal LIMITED WARRANTY 7 1 Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period its standard generally supported Products when properly installed will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual Mentor Graphics does not warrant that Products will meet Customer s requirements or that operation of Products will be uninterrupted or error free The warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation whichever first occurs Customer must notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period For the avoidance of doubt this warranty applies only to the initial shipment of Software under an Order and does not renew or reset for example with the delivery of a Software updates or b authorization codes or alternate Software under a transaction involving Software re mix This warranty shall not be valid if Products have been subject to misuse unauthorized modification improper installation or Customer is not in compliance with this Agreement MENTOR GRAPHICS ENTIRE LIABILITY AND CUSTOMER S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE AT MENTOR GRAPHICS OPTION EITHER A REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON RETURN OF THE PRODUCTS TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR B MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO A SERVICES
226. lues Pane The values pane displays the values of the displayed signals You can resize the values pane by clicking on and dragging the right border Some signals may be too wide too many bits for their values to be fully displayed Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the pane to see the entire signal value Small signal values will remain in view while scrolling The radix for each signal can be symbolic binary octal decimal unsigned hexadecimal ASCII or default The default radix for all signals can be set by selecting Simulate gt Runtime Options Note EO When the symbolic radix is chosen for SystemVerilog reg and integer types the values are treated as binary When the symbolic radix is chosen for SystemVerilog bit and int types the values are considered to be decimal To change the radix for just the selected signal or signals select Wave gt Format gt Radix gt Global Signal Radix from the menus or right click the selected signal s and select Radix gt Global Signal Radix from the popup menu This opens the Global Signal Radix dialog Figure 4 96 where you may select a radix This sets the radix for the selected signal s in the Wave window and every other window where the signal appears ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 2 3 Window Reference Wave Window Figure 4 96 Setting the Global Signal Radix from the Wave Window x Signal top p addr Specify a radix to apply to the selected
227. lumn all together No Delta however this will display the value at the final delta Strobe trigger Specify an interval at which you want to trigger data display Trigger gating Use a gating expression to control triggering see Using Gating Expressions to Control Triggering for more details 164 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference List Window Using Gating Expressions to Control Triggering Trigger gating controls the display of data based on an expression Triggering is enabled once the gating expression evaluates to true This setup behaves much like a hardware signal analyzer that starts recording data on a specified setup of address bits and clock edges Here are some points about gating expressions e Gating expressions affect the display of data but not acquisition of the data e The expression is evaluated when the List window would normally have displayed a row of data given the other trigger settings The duration determines for how long triggering stays enabled after the gating expression returns to false 0 The default of O duration will enable triggering only while the expression is true 1 The duration is expressed in x number of default timescale units e Gating is level sensitive rather than edge triggered Trigger Gating Example Using the Expression Builder This example shows how to create a gating expression with the ModelSim Expression Builder Here is the procedure 1 Selec
228. mes UDP expressions in a level and each level under that hit level have been executed UDP Expressions the number of executable UDP expressions in a level and all levels under missed that level that were not executed Popup Menu Right click anywhere in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 30 Instance Coverage Popup Menu Popup Menu tem Code coverage reports Displays the Coverage Text Report dialog box which allows you to create reports based on your code coverage metrics Displays the Filter Instance List Dialog Box Clear code coverage data Clears all of the code coverage data from the GUI Test Analysis Executes coverage analyze on the selected instance and prints information to the Test Analysis window Find Least Coverage Find Most Coverage Find Zero Coverage Find Non Zero Coverage Summary XML Import Hint Displays the XML Import Hint dialog box with information about the Link Type and Name ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 147 Library Window Use this window to view design libraries and compiled design units Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Library Command view library Figure 4 23 Library Window Library T a T r wark Library hui and Module ui cache Module ui cache set Module N memory Module fy ore Module N proc Module fy top Module Ra Cop_opt Optimized
229. n the simulation has encountered a breakpoint e you select any process in either the Structure or Processes windows When debugging your design you can use the call stack data to analyze the depth of function calls that led up to the current point of the simulation which include e Verilog functions and tasks e VHDL functions and procedures SystemC methods and threads e C C functions The Call Stack window also supports C Debug mode Accessing Access the window using the following menu item e View gt Call Stack Figure 4 3 Call Stack Window Call stack Ea lea Fea rs rs 0 Module Bat 30 C Questal estcases ack iewy callstack sv CETE 1 Function Fa ran C QuertaT ertcares caletackview calstack y EEN 2 Function f2 20 C QuestaT estcases callstackView callstack sv 7e83al8f 3 Function H 15 C QuestaTestcases callstackView callstack sy 7e839efd 4 Module top 35 C QuestaT esteases callstackView callstack sy 7e63a9b5 Call Stack Window Tasks This window allows you to perform the following actions e Double click on the line of any function call o Displays the local variables at that level in the Locals Window o Displays the corresponding source code in the Source Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 95 Window Reference Call Stack Window Related Commands of the Call Stack Window Table 4 7 Commands Related to the Call Stack Window stack down this command moves down the call stack this c
230. n Upon Mentor Graphics authorization Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a temporary nontransferable nonexclusive license for experimental use to test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics This grant and Customer s use of the Beta Code shall not be construed as marketing or offering to sell a license to the Beta Code which Mentor Graphics may choose not to release commercially in any form 4 2 If Mentor Graphics authorizes Customer to use the Beta Code Customer agrees to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics Customer will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during Customer s use of the Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements Upon completion of Customer s evaluation and testing Customer will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code including its strengths weaknesses and recommended improvements 4 3 Customer agrees to maintain Beta Code in confidence and shall restrict access to the Beta Code including the methods and concepts utilized therein solely to those employees and Customer location s authorized by Mentor Graphics to perform beta testing Customer agrees that any written evaluations and all inventions product improvements modifications or developments that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement including those based partly or wholly on
231. n check mark or excluded from X mark aggregate statistics and reports of Goal the percentage of the coverage goal that has been reached 120 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Covergroups Window Table 4 18 Covergroups Window Columns cont over Goal the percentage over the coverage goal that has been reached the value of the merge_instances covergroup type option When true cumulative or type coverage is computed by merging instances together as the union of coverage of all instances Merge_instances When false type coverage is computed as the weighted average of instances When auto 1 or auto 0 is displayed this indicates a default value chosen by tool with the effective value inside the parenthesis the number of covergroup bins missing coverage the name of the covergroup and its components Peak Transient Memory the peak transient memory used by the covergroup Peak Transient Memory Time the simulation run time at which the peak transient memory usage occurred Persistent Memory the persistent memory used by the covergroup Samples the sample count of covergroups TY PEs and covergroup instances graphical representation of the Coverage column Strobe the value of the strobe coverage group type option If set to 1 all samples happen at the end of the time slot like the strobe system task Total Bins displays the total of bins for covergroup
232. n FFMDelay preference variable 18 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General GUI Tasks Moving a Window or Tab Group 1 Click on the header handle in the title bar of the window or tab group Figure 1 2 Window Header Handle Objects 2 Drag without releasing the mouse button the window or tab group to a different area of the Main window Wherever you move your mouse you will see a dark blue outline that previews where the window will be placed If the preview outline is a rectangle centered within a window it indicates that you will convert the window or tab group into new tabs within the highlighted window 3 Release the mouse button to complete the move Moving a Tab out of a Tab Group 1 Click on the tab handle that you want to move Figure 1 3 Tab Handle Le O9 Processes 2 Drag without releasing the mouse button the tab to a different area of the Main window Wherever you move your mouse you will see a dark blue outline that previews where the tab will be placed If the preview outline is a rectangle centered within a window it indicates that you will move the tab into the highlighted window 3 Release the mouse button to complete the move Undocking a Window from the Main Window Follow the steps in Moving a Window or Tab Group but drag the window outside of the Main window or e Click on the Dock Undock button for the window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c
233. n Singapore before a single arbitrator to be appointed by the chairman of the Singapore International Arbitration Centre SIAC to be conducted in the English language in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute which rules are deemed to be incorporated by reference in this section Nothing in this section shall restrict Mentor Graphics right to bring an action including for example a motion for injunctive relief against Customer in the jurisdiction where Customer s place of business is located The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement SEVERABILITY If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect MISCELLANEOUS This Agreement contains the parties entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements Some Software may contain code distributed under a third party license agreement that may provide additional rights to Customer Please see the applicable Software documentation for details This Agreement may only be modified in writing signed by an authorized representative of each party Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent co
234. n order of the hierarchy if enabled Time Range Allows you to filter which messages appear according to simulation time The default is to display messages for the complete simulation time Displayed Objects Allows you to filter which messages appear according to the values in the Objects column The default is to display all messages regardless of the values in the Objects column The Objects in the list text entry box allows you to specify filter strings where each string must be on a new line Message Viewer Filter Expression Create Filter Dialog Box The Message Viewer gt Filter Expression gt Create Filter dialog box allows you to create filter rules that specify which messages should be shown in the message viewer It contains a series of dropdown and text entry boxes for creating the filter rules and supports the addition of additional rule rows to create logical groupings From left to right each filter rule 1s made up of the following 188 Add and Remove buttons either add a rule filter row below the current row or remove that rule filter row Logic field specifies a logical argument for combining adjacent rules Your choices are AND OR NAND and NOR This field is greyed out for the first rule filter row Open Parenthesis field controls rule groupings by specifying if necessary any open parentheses The up and down arrows increase or decrease the number of parentheses in the field Column fiel
235. n the List Watch and Wave windows instead of numeric values Example 6 1 Using the radix define Command radix define States 11 b 00000000001 IDLE 11 00000000010 CTRL 11 b 00000000100 WT_WD_1 11 b 00000001000 WT_WD_2 11 b 00000010000 WT_BLK_1 11 b 00000100000 WT_BLK_2 11 b 00001000000 WT_BLK_3 11 b 00010000000 WT_BLK_4 11 bOO1LO0000000 WT_BLK_5 11 b 01000000000 RD WD 11 b10000000000 RD_WD_2 default hex Figure 6 5 shows an FSM signal called test sm sm_seqO sm_O state in the Wave window with a binary radix and with the user defined States radix as defined in Example 6 1 Figure 6 5 User Defined Radix States in the Wave Window e _ _ stake fhest_sroifsm_seqdism_ Os DOOOROOTSOO O00 IOoooNnoo1o0 looooono oo0 Noooo0ooo0001 ee et ee fn ne te eee TOLE iq itest sroifsm seqgdi sm Ofstate WT Wo 2 IDLE wT Wo 1 wy Wo 2 Plow 211200 ps E poo oaen I rl ev FF Figure 6 6 shows an FSM signal called test sm sm_seqO sm_O state in the List window with a binary radix and with the user defined States radix as defined in Example 6 1 300 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Customization User Defined Radices Figure 6 6 User Defined Radix States in the List Window psy ftest sns seq0 sn 0 state y delta ftest susu seq0 sm U state y 291000 0 OOOOLOO0000 Wl ELE 3 311000 0 OOOLOOO0000 WT BLE 4
236. n your design Single dimensional arrays of integers are interpreted as 2D memory arrays In these cases the word width listed in the Memory window is equal to the integer size and the depth is the size of the array itself Memories with three or more dimensions display with a plus sign next to their names in the Memory window Click the to show the array indices under that level When you finally expand down to the 2D level you can double click on the index and the data for the selected 2D slice of the memory will appear in a memory contents window Prerequisites The simulator identifies certain kinds of arrays in various scopes as memories Memory identification depends on the array element kind as well as the overall array kind that is associative array unpacked array and so forth Table 4 41 Identification any integral type that is integer_type Element Kind enum bit_vector floating point type std_logic_vector std_ulogic_vector integer type ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c shortint int longint byte bit 2 state logic reg integer time 4 state packed_struct packed_union 2 state packed_struct packed_union 4 state packed_array single Dim multi D 2 state and 4 state e enum string unsigned char unsigned short unsigned int unsigned long unsigned long long char short int float double enum sc_bigint sc_biguint Sc_int
237. nce Manual v10 2c 181 Message Viewer Window Use this window to easily access organize and analyze any Note Warning Error or other elaboration and runtime messages written to the transcript during the simulation run Prerequisites By default the tool writes transcripted messages during elaboration and runtime only to the transcript To write messages to the WLF file thus the Message Viewer window use the displaymsgmode and msgmode options with the vsim commmand to change the default behavior By writing messages to the WLF file the Message Viewer window is able to organize the messages for your analysis during the current simulation as well as during post simulation You can control what messages are available in the transcript WLF file or both with the following switches e displaymsgmode messages User generated messages resulting from calls to Verilog Display System Tasks and PLI FLI print function calls By default these messages are written only to the transcript which means you cannot access them through the Message Viewer window In many cases these user generated messages are intended to be output as a group of transcripted messages thus the default of transcript only The Message Viewer treats each message individually therefore you could lose the context of these grouped messages by modifying the view or sort order of the Message Viewer To change this default behavior you can use the displaymsgmode argument wit
238. nce and memory profiling data provides access to information about Projects Schematic Window displays information about the design in schematic format Source Window a text editor for viewing and editing files such as Verilog VHDL SystemC and DO files Structure Window displays hierarchical view of active simulation Name of Also known as the sim window is either sim or lt dataset_name gt window Transaction View Window displays the details of Questa Verification IP transaction instances Not available for any other type of transactions Transcript Window keeps a running history of commands and messages and provides a command line interface Verification Management displays information about UCDB tests for the purpose Browser Window of managing the verification process Watch Window displays signal or variable values at the current simulation time 84 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 85 Assertions Window Use this window to view all embedded and external assertions that were successfully compiled and simulated during the current session Accessing Menu item View gt Coverage gt Assertions e Command view assertions Figure 4 1 Assertions Window A 4sseetians UTT FIN Name e Assertion Type L anguage nable F ailure Count Pass A rtestal Concurrent SV a 0 A testapl Concurrent FSL on 0 A testai
239. nce data Memory Menu Tools gt Profile gt Enable collection of memory mi Profiling Memory usage data Edit Menu Tools gt Breakpoint Enable breakpoint editing li Breakpoints loading and saving Show Cause Button Clicking this button initiates a trace on a signal event back to the first sequential driving process When you click and hold the button you can access additional options via a dropdown menu as shown in Figure 3 19 68 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Source Toolbar Figure 3 19 Show Cause Dropdown Menu OOF 0 Show Driver et Show Cause OPO Show Rook Cause Bpi Show W Cause Chaser J Show All Possible Drivers oopa Show Driver From Tire naa Show Cause From Time op E Show Fook Cause From Time View Path Details Preferences ef Set Default Action e Show Cause Refer to Tracing to the First Sequential Process Show Driver Refer to Tracing to the Immediate Driving Process e Show Root Cause Refer to Tracing to the Root Cause e Show X Cause ChaseX Refer to Tracing to the Root Cause of an X Show All Possible Drivers Refer to Finding All Possible Drivers Show Cause from Time Refer to Tracing from a Specific Time Show Driver from Time Refer to Tracing from a Specific Time Show Root Cause from Time Refer to Tracing from a Specific Time e View Path Det
240. nce eens 260 GUI Elements of the Verification Browser Window 0 cece eee ees 260 Watch WintOW oaccanete abchmapecdaemanow AUER eaoe DESREI EREEREER ONDERNE AS 266 Watch WindOw Task ooorece ens doce dau 64 ieee te dee dba bo dean deed esa ads 267 GUI Elements of the Watch Window 0 0 ccc ee teenies 267 Wave WINGOW sack rcerbtete cade keke Geter ep eedehenegedenete ce sekedagadene lt 271 Add Objects to the Wave Window 0 eee eens 271 Wave Window Panes 20 04 ci c00deeeaee dead dete EEEE RAEE EE R ies 212 Objects You Can View in the Wave Window 0 0 00 ccc eee eens 278 Wave Window Toolbar 1 2 cee ee eens 279 Chapter 5 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions ccc cece cece cece esc crceeeecceens 281 Joyo pest ooasge nanos enaceaee sant e areemapeaeeeaaee E ae aaeaeg ead 281 Window Specific Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee eens 281 User Defined Keyboard SHOPMCUS lt 4 2 424 20ce00bb0deed4ebegaaesidw des dbdeeces 282 The Keyboard Shortcuts Dialog Box 0 0 ene nee 282 Main and Source Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts 0 000000 285 List of Keyboard Shortcuts in GUI Windows 000 eee eee 288 List Window Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 cee eee eeeas 289 Wave Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 0 ccc ene 289 6 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Table of Contents Chapter 6 SURG CVA ee a ee ee ee ee eT 293 Customizing
241. nce other threads are still running BE clock time amp clock name ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 93 Window Reference ATV Window Table 4 5 Graphic Symbols for Clock Thread and Directive Status cont Graphic Symbol Status Information Thread killed because directive was aborted or disabled Thread killed because other thread caused unilateral pass fail Thread passed but directive waiting on other running threads Right click in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 6 ATV Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tiem Open the source file and highlight the assertion Toggles the appearance of grid lines Ascending Expressions Toggles the display of the assertion into ascending or descending mode Popup Menu Annotate Local Vars Displays local variable information in the Thread Viewer pane Show Local Vars Toggles the display of the Local Variables pane Show Design Objects Toggles the display of the Design Objects pane View Full Object Names Toggles the display of the object names in the Design Objects pane Adds the assertion to the selected window Controls the zoom level of the Thread Viewer pane 1 These menu items are only available when right clicking on the right hand side of the window 94 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Call Stack Window The Call Stack window displays the current call stack when e you single step the simulatio
242. nd else begin case vw state RUY begin 1f W LD begin Each coverage type window includes a column for the line number and a column for statement branch condition expression or toggle on that line An icon indicates whether the object was executed green check mark not executed red X or excluded green E See Table 4 53 for a complete list of icons In the banner for all Coverage Analysis window types the following information appears name of the window whether the coverage is by file or by instance depending on whether a file was selected in the Files tab or an instance or du from the sim tab scope of the coverage item in parentheses being displayed e Analysis Type button Covered Items button Missed Coverage buttons Excluded Items button see Table 4 15 You can change the scope displayed for all Code Coverage Analysis windows by selecting a new scope in the Structure or Files windows When you select left click any item in the Statement Branch Condition Expression FSM or Toggle Analysis windows the Coverage Details Window populates with related details ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 109 Window Reference Code Coverage Analysis Window coverage statistic details truth tables exclusions and so on about that object In the case of a multi line statement branch condition or expression select the object on the last line of the item The Branch Analysis window includes
243. ne radix names radix list e radix delete Using the radix define Command The radix define command is used to create or modify a radix It must include a radix name and a definition body which consists of a list of number pattern label pairs Optionally it may include the color argument for setting the radix color see Example 6 2 lt numeric value gt lt enum label gt lt numeric value gt lt enum label gt default lt radix gt A lt numeric value gt is any legitimate HDL integer numeric literal To be more specific ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 299 GUI Customization User Defined Radices oe lt base gt is B O TO or X lt base gt lt base integer gt lt base gt is 2 or 16 lt base gt bit value lt integer gt lt size gt lt base gt lt number gt lt size gt is an integer lt base gt is b d o or h Check the Verilog and VHDL LRMs for exact definitions of these numeric literals The comma in the definition body is optional The lt enum label gt is any arbitrary string It should be quoted especially if it contains spaces The default entry is optional If present it defines the radix to use if a match is not found for a given value The default entry can appear anywhere in the list it does not have to be at the end Example 6 1 shows the radix define command used to create a radix called States which will display state values i
244. ng the current action for each possible state Failure Pass Start and Antecedent The field will always show four letters that indicate the current action e C Continue e B Break e E Exit e S Subroutine Call where the order of the letters relates to the state e F Failure P Pass e S Start e A Antecedent For example if you see CCSB you can derive the following e Failure state Continue action e Pass state Continue action e Start state Subroutine Call action e Antecedent state Break action 88 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Assertions Window Table 4 2 Assertions Window Columns cont or excluded from X mark aggregate statistics and reports Identifies the assert directive you specified in the assertion code Pass Count The total number of times the assertions has passed in the current simulation This column is populated when you specify assertcover or assertdebug for vsim or if either the AssertionCover or AssertionDebug ini file variable is set to 1 Pass Log enabled pass messages will be logged to the transcript disabled pass messages will not be logged to the transcript Only enabled if the simulator is invoked with the assertdebug option or the ini file variable AssertionDebug is set to 1 Peak Active Count The peak simultaneously active thread count that has occurred up to the current time Peak Active Count will also be
245. ng this signal fhestifref reg To continue the trace select which driver to use Process Name Signal Name FOL WAY SHE fhesti fbr ref_reg lt br g4 i fbeskl sy AL WAYS I46 fhestifulfdibgTemps oo 4 alwaysi posedge clk posedge s posedger 146 vo ftesti sy FOLWwaysati46 fheskifueidigTemps o 4 alwaysi posedge clk posedges posedger 146 vofteasti sy Values shown For time YOO ns Continue Backtrace Stop Select any driver to open the code for that driver The Show Readers selection opens the Source Readers window If there is more than one reader for the signal all will be displayed Figure 4 72 Figure 4 72 Source Readers Dialog Displays All Signal Readers x Readers of testl d Readers for teatld Ner o eesti a Net testl ul data Net testl ue data Reader testl 455IGW 3e2 Reader testl ul ALUaAys 146 Reader testl fuz ALUAYs 146 ox Limitations The Source window s textual dataflow functions only work for pure HDL It will not work for SystemC or for complex data types like SystemVerilog classes Language Templates ModelSim language templates help you write code They are a collection of wizards menus and dialogs that produce code for new designs test benches language constructs logic blocks and so forth 226 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Note a uaua The language templates are not intended to re
246. ng_pool_ Class Instance Super imem_item 903 muyin_object_string_ pool s Class uyvm_seq ce Super imem_item 305 uym_object_string_pool s VClass uyvm_ tran H m_sequence_id Int np in_use_sequence_int 1 Protected Bit ce m_depth 1 Protected Int pe s m_sequencer im_sequencer 642 Guyvm_report_handler class Instance ce ihparentsequence m_mem_seg 499 uym_oabject_string_poo Class Instance print seguence_info Bit i rn_client_str Protected string m_client null Class Instance i merh null Class Instance a issued 0 Static Bit ond issued 0 Static Bit 3 report_id MEM_ITEM String gt instruction READ Enum ce gt address QOOOOU00 Packed Array pes data_to_dut OOOOU0OO00000000 Packed Array oa data_to_dut_valid 0 Bit pe latency OOOOO000 Packed Array ce data_from_dut OOOOOU0O00000000 Packed Array pes choose_read_address 0 Int ce addresses written_list O COOO000000000000F 71 O000000011001 static Associative pes instructions_sent static Int i type_name mem _iter static string fermen tems im_out_item 901 uyvm_object_string_pool Class Instance ta mem temr mem manitor itemi AAA uve obiect strin Class Instance kd Sim mem _ agent pkg nem iter fixed Z ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 102 Window Reference Class Instances Window Viewing Class Instances The Class Instances window is dynamically populated by selecting SVClasses in the Structure sim window All currently acti
247. ngle click highlights selected objects Double click opens a Code Preview window with the source code of the selected item highlighted Figure 4 62 Code Preview Window Code Preview testl s always iposedge clk posedge reset ifireset l bl begin g x 1 Click and drag selects all objects within the bounding box Shift click highlights multiple selected objects The alternate mouse modes affect the above mouse controls as follows Schematic gt Mouse Mode gt Zoom Mode Left mouse button Single click selects items click and drag performs zoom actions Middle mouse button click and drag pans the schematic view e Schematic gt Mouse Mode gt Pan Mode Left mouse button Single click selects items click and drag pans the schematic view Middle mouse button click and drag performs zoom actions Controlling the Data Displayed in the Schematic Window The schematic window provides additional control over the amount and type of information displayed depending on whether you are using the Incremental View or the Full View Display options are available by selecting Schematic gt Preferences from the Main menu when the Schematic window ts active ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 209 Window Reference Schematic Window Display Options When the Incremental view is active the Schematic gt Preferences menu selection opens the Incremental Schematic Options dialog Fi
248. ngs for later use The keyboard shortcuts to use this feature are e Ctrl P retrieve previous search string e Ctrl N retrieve next search string Other hotkey actions include e Esc closes the Find toolbar e Enter Windows or Return UNIX or Linux initiates a Find Next action e Ctrl T search while typing default is on The entry field turns red if no matches are found The graphic elements associated with the Find toolbar are shown in Table 1 2 26 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General GUI Tasks Note __ SF The Find Toolbar graphic elements are context driven The actions available change for each window Table 1 2 Graphic Elements of Toolbar in Find Mode opens the find toolbar in the active window HB entry field Find entry field allows entry of find parameters a Find Options opens the Find Options popup menu at the bottom of the active window The contents of the menu changes for each window ae Clear Entry Field clears the entry field p Toggle Search Direction toggles search direction upward or 4 downward through the active window Find All Matches highlights every occurrence of the find Bookmark All Matches for Source item for the Source window only window only places a blue flag bookmark at every occurrence of the find item Search For Click and hold the button to open a drop down menu with the following options Instance Des
249. notify Mentor Graphics promptly in writing of the action b provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance to settle or defend the action and c grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action 12 13 14 15 16 17 11 2 Ifaclaim is made under Subsection 11 1 Mentor Graphics may at its option and expense a replace or modify the Product so that it becomes noninfringing b procure for Customer the right to continue using the Product or c require the return of the Product and refund to Customer any purchase price or license fee paid less a reasonable allowance for use 11 3 Mentor Graphics has no liability to Customer if the action is based upon a the combination of Software or hardware with any product not furnished by Mentor Graphics b the modification of the Product other than by Mentor Graphics c the use of other than a current unaltered release of Software d the use of the Product as part of an infringing process e a product that Customer makes uses or sells f any Beta Code or Product provided at no charge g any software provided by Mentor Graphics licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics customers or h infringement by Customer that is deemed willful In the case of h Customer shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its reasonable attorney fees and other costs related to the action 11 4 THIS SE
250. nscript Window Figure 4 87 Changing the colorizeTranscript Preference Value Preferences x By Window By Name alel Preference Item Value Description E lain AllFileTypes TAI Files determines the Save as Type file list in the File 5aveAs dialc i assertColor the color of assertion messages in the Main window that are pre background the background color used in the Main window tange of values background tf352f332T3 32 the background color used in the Main window range of values ondHistory the name of the file which stores the Main window command his colorizeTranscipt if set to 1 different types of Transcript messages display in difi ContainsMode gt fe must be one Change Main Preference Value 7 EEFT ange Main Preference Value ee a ce CrossSelectExpand 0 i New value for n cross highligh DatasetFileTypes SPrefSource Daty PrefMain colorizeTranscript wse dialog whe DefaultSimDatasetN sim p is variable det Nefeadtirhialnatae wirhiale ic wariahle det _ rs _ OK Cancel Expand All Collapse All Find Change Value Reset Defaults Disabling Creation of the Transcript File You can disable the creation of the transcript file by using the following ModelSim command immediately after ModelSim starts transcript file Performing an Incremental Search The Transcript tab includes an Find function Figure 4 88 that allows you to do an increme
251. nsent waiver or excuse Rev 130502 Part No 255853
252. ntal search for specific text To activate the Find bar select Edit gt Find from the menus or click the Find icon in the toolbar For more information see Find and Filter Functions 256 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Transcript Window Figure 4 88 Transcript Window with Find Toolbar ans cript Loading work _and fast Loading work cachelFast Loading work cache_setifast Loading work memory Fast 20 Starting Read Write test 20 Writing data 0000 to addr 00 60 TETE picking set 3 220 Writing data 0001 to addr 01 260 Write miss picking set 3 420 Writing data o002 to addr Oz Find EA write miss P O qi aal s Using Automatic Command Help When you start typing a command at the prompt a dropdown box appears which lists the available commands matching what has been typed so far You may use the Up and Down arrow keys or the mouse to select the desired command When a unique command has been entered the command usage is presented in the drop down box You can toggle this feature on and off by selecting Help gt Command Completion Using drivers and Readers Command Results The output from the drivers and readers commands which is displayed in the Transcript window as hypertext links allows you to right click to open a drop down menu and to quickly add signals to various windows It also includes a View Declaration item to open the source de
253. ntext selection in a structure pane The Show All Context display mode implies the recursive display mode as well so the Recursive Mode selection is automatically grayed out You can choose between these two display modes by right clicking in the Cover Directives window and selecting the option from the Display Options sub menu ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 113 Coverage Details Window Use this window to view detailed results about coverage metrics from your simulation Prerequisites This window is specific to the collection of coverage metrics therefore you must have run your simulation with coverage collection enabled Refer to the chapter Code Coverage for more information Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Coverage gt Details e Command view details You can populate this window by selecting an item in one of the panes of the Code Coverage Analysis Window either Statement Branch Expression Condition FSM or Toggle Coverage Details of Statement Coverage The Coverage Details window displays the following information about Statement Coverage metrics Instance the dataset name followed by the hierarchical location of the statement Only appears when you are analyzing coverage metrics by instance e File the name of the file containing the statement e Line the line number of the statement In the case of a multi line statement this is
254. o oO PRrEFrPrPFOORrPrRFRe ROG 206 206 Z O6 206 206 206 06 206 06 206 206 0 0 l Bl Sl 51 Bl Sl Bl l Bl Window Reference List Window In addition to the List Signal Properties dialog box you can also change the radix Saving the Window Format Change the default radix for the current simulation using Simulate gt Runtime Options Main window Change the default radix for the current simulation using the radix command Change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix variable in the modelsim ini file By default all List window information is lost once you close the window If you want to restore the windows to a previously configured layout you must save a window format file as follows I L 3 Add the objects you want to the List window Edit and format the objects to create the view you want Save the format to a file by selecting File gt Save Format This opens the Save Format dialog box where you can save List window formats in a do file To use the format file start with a blank List window and run the DO file in one of two ways ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Invoke the do command from the command line VSIM gt do lt my_format_file gt 161 Window Reference List Window e Select File gt Load Note Window format files are design specific Use them only with the design you were simulating when they were created
255. oes amp hh AA eh A a es es TEO A 91 ATV Window Tasks 0 0 00 ee cee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee nee 92 GUI Elements of the ATV Window 0 0 0 0 eee ee ee eee ee eee 92 Call Stack WindOW 2206 44 00542454 c6040680 640044645400 06464006n044eR50500080 95 Call Stack Window Tasks 0 0 0 0 cc eee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee ees 95 Related Commands of the Call Stack Window 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 96 GUI Elements of the Call Stack Window 0 00 0 eee eee ee eee 96 Capacity W 1G OW sses seie aia aoi woe ew Be wed ee AR te Be wt wk Ae et ee Be E 97 GUI Elements of the Capacity Window 0 ccc nnn ees 97 Class Graph VW MUOW sc eccgene ae canes neasaresehedaeweneesuess ERENS 100 Class Graph Window Tasks 0 0 0 ce eee e eens 100 GUI Elements of the Class Graph Window 0 0 0 ccc ces 101 Class Instances Window 0 0 cc eee ce eee ee ee eee ee eee eee eens 102 GUI Elements of the Class Instances Window 0 0 0 ce eee ee ee eee 103 Class ree W INUOW 3253 60 554 06804544956 864468 506 ES 4455S bob ORES EEE S esa 104 GUI Elements of the Class Tree Window 0 0 cc eee ee ee eee eae 104 Code Coverage Analysis WindoOW 0 eee e eens 106 GUI Elements of the Code Coverage Analysis Window 0 0 0 0 ce eens 106 Viewing Code Coverage Data and Current Exclusions 0 000 eee eee 108 Cover Directives Window 0 0
256. of the Objects Window pO Only to show inouts Vies Internal None Changes the view of the Objects Window il Signals to show Internal Signals Reset All None Clears the filtering of Objects Window ALL Filters entries and displays all objects a z Change Filter Opens the Filter Objects dialog box Precision Toolbar The Precision toolbar allows you to control the precision of the data in the Verification Management windows Browser Tracker Results Analysis Figure 3 14 Precision Toolbar Precision 2 84 Table 3 14 Precision Toolbar Buttons precision 2 Set Precision Menu A text entry box that for VMgmt Verification allows you to control the Browser gt precision of the data in the Set Precision Verification Browser window Restore Restores the precision to an Default the default value 2 Precision ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 63 Toolbars Process Toolbar Process Toolbar The Process toolbar contains three toggle buttons only one can be active at any time that controls the view of the Process window Figure 3 15 Process Toolbar a oy 2 Table 3 15 Process Toolbar Buttons Reem Nene sero Description View Active Menu Process gt Active Changes the view of the Processes Processes Window to only show active processes View Menu Process gt In Region Changes the view of the Processes in Processes window to only Region show processes in the active region View Men
257. og Apply Applies filter to selected item s Display Options Displays covergroups recursively or in all contexts Exclude Selected Excludes selected item s from coverage statistics collection and reports Clear Exclusion Clears coverage exclusion for selected item s Covergroups Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Covergroups window Changing the Covergroups Window Display Options Note Covergroups are created dynamically during simulation This means they will not display in the GUI until you run the simulation 122 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Covergroups Window You can set the window to display covergroups in a Recursive Mode or in a Show All Contexts mode The Recursive Mode displays all covergroups at and below the selected hierarchy instance the selection being taken from a Structure window that is the sim tab Otherwise only items actually in that particular scope are shown The Show All Contexts selection displays all instances in the design It does not follow the current context selection in the Structure window The Show All Context display mode implies the recursive display mode as well so the Recursive Mode selection is automatically grayed out You can choose between these two display modes by right clicking in the Covergroups window and selecting the option from the Display Options sub menu ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2
258. oggle Coverage Columns in the Objects Window Kind eoipagpe oOo 1H gt OL the number of times each object has transitioned from a 1 or a High state to a O or a Low state OL gt Z the number of times each object has transitioned from a 0 or a Low state to a high impedance Z state Z gt OL the number of times each object has transitioned from a high impedance state to a O or a Low state 1H gt Z the number of times each object has transitioned from a 1 or a High state to a high impedance state OL gt 1H the number of times each object has transitioned from a 0 or a Low state to or a High state 194 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Objects Window Table 4 49 Toggle Coverage Columns in the Objects Window cont the number of times each object has transitioned from a high impedance state to 1 or a High state State the current ration of State Hits to State Count the number of scalar bits in each object Toggled the number of nodes that have transitioned at least once A signal is considered toggled if and only if e it has 0 gt l and 1 gt 0 transitions and NO Z transitions or e if there are ANY Z transitions it must have ALL four of the Z transitions Otherwise the counts are place in 01 or Z columns For more specifics on what is considered toggled see Understanding Toggle Counts Toggled the current ratio of the Toggled to the Nodes for each object Ol th
259. ommand selects the specified call frame stack level this command reports the current call frame number stack tb this command is an alias for the tb command this command moves up the call stack GUI Elements of the Call Stack Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Column Descriptions Table 4 8 Call Stack Window Columns indicates the depth of the function call with the most recent at the top indicates the function If you see unknown in this column you have most likely optimized the design such that the information is not available during the simulation indicates the line number containing the function call indicates the location of the file containing the function call Address indicates the address of the execution in a foreign subprogram such as C 96 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Capacity Window Use this window to display memory capacity data about your simulation Refer to the section Capacity Analysis for more information Accessing Access the window using either of the following Menu item View gt Capacity e Command view capacity Figure 4 4 Capacity Window Capac ity Gs fea Fa Piipeidbet n SO Current Memory Pesk Memory oak ine Classes 11 9K 11 9K Ons zH HDAS 1491 E s ot Ok Ons H Assertions 5 OB 1446 5m5 el Verilog Memories 132 1 8 1 5K Ons el Module instances 2 1366 ed Function instances oot eo 2K IS Task instanc
260. on Any search terms or settings you enter are saved from one search to the next in the current simulation To clear the search settings during debugging click the Reset To Initial Settings button The search terms and settings are cleared when you close ModelSim Note ___ If your signal values are displayed in binary radix refer to Searching for Binary Signal Values in the GUI for details on how signal values are mapped between a binary radix and std_logic Using the Expression Builder for Expression Searches The Expression Builder is a feature of the List Signal Search dialog box and the List trigger properties dialog box You can use it to create a search expression that follows the GUIL_expression_format 156 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference List Window To display the Expression Builder dialog box do the following 1 Choose Edit gt Signal Search from the main menu This displays the Wave Signal Search dialog box 2 Select Search for Expression 3 Click the Builder button This displays the Expression Builder dialog box shown in Figure 4 32 Figure 4 32 Expression Builder Dialog Box Expression Builder x oS Expression Builder Selected Signal a aoj on oa l gt sor su _x 2 saj seal Clear Save Test OK Cancel You click the buttons in the Expression Builder dialog box to create a GUI expression Each button generates a corres
261. on Management Browser Window Table 4 56 Verification Browser Icons cont Browser Icon Description Indicates the file is a merged UCDB file Notations on right hand side mean the following P verification test plan is included in merged UCDB e Totals merge e 2 Test associated merge See Test Associated Merge versus Totals Merge Algorithm for more information Verification Browser Window Tasks Controlling the Verification Browser Columns You can customize the appearance of the Browser using either of the following methods e Use the Column Layout Toolbar to select from several pre defined column arrangements e Right click in the column headings to display a list of all column headings which allows you to toggle the columns on or off Saving Verification Browser Column and Filter Settings Save your column layout and any filter settings to an external file browser_column_layout do by selecting File gt Export gt Column Layout while the window is active You can reload these settings with the do command This export does not retain changes to column width Viewing Verification Browser Data in HTML You can Export the view of the columns and verification data in the Browser including any filter settings to an HTML file browser htm using the by selecting File gt Export gt HTML while the window is active A dialog opens in which you can set both the name of the file and the directory to w
262. ons 0 2 0 eens 1I Table 3 25 Wave Edit Toolbar Buttons 0 0000 eaae 78 Table 3 26 Wave Expand Time Toolbar Buttons 0 00 ccc cc eee 79 Table 3 27 Zoom Toolbar Buttons 0 0 cee eens 80 Table 4 1 GUI Windows 0 0 eee eee ene eens 83 Table 4 2 Assertions Window Columns 0 0 ccc cee eee eens 86 Table 4 3 Assertions Window Popup Menu 0 eee eee eee eee 90 Table 4 4 Graphic Symbols for Current Directive State 0 0 cee eee 93 Table 4 5 Graphic Symbols for Clock Thread and Directive Status 93 Table 4 6 ATV WIndow Popup Menu 0 ccc eee eens 94 Table 4 7 Commands Related to the Call Stack Window 0 0 000 eee 96 Table 4 8 Call Stack Window Columns 0 0 ccc ccc eee eens 96 Table 4 9 Capacity Window Columns 0 00 ee eens 97 Table 4 10 Class Graph Window Popup Menu 0 cece eee eee eee 101 Table 4 11 Class Instances Window Popup Menu 0 00 cece eee eee 103 Table 4 12 Class Tree Window Icons 0 0 cece teen eens 104 Table 4 13 Class Tree Window Columns 0 0 0 nes 105 Table 4 14 Class Tree Window Popup Menu 0 cece ee eee eens 105 Table 4 15 Contents of Code Coverage Analysis Tithe Bar 004 107 Table 4 16 Code Coverage Analysis Window Popup Menu 005 108 Table 4 17 Cover Direc
263. ontents of the window Compiles the selected file Runs vopt on the selected file a Create Wave Runs the wave create command for any ports in the selected design unit Delete Removes a design unit from the library or runs the vdel command on a selected library Copy Copies the directory location of libraries or the library location of design units within the library New Allows you to create a new library with the Create a New Library dialog box Properties Displays information about the selected library or design unit ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 149 List Window The List window displays simulation results in tabular format Common List window tasks include e Using gating expressions and trigger settings to focus in on particular signals or events See Configuring New Line Triggering e Debugging delta delay issues See Delta Delays for more information The window is divided into two adjustable panes which allows you to scroll horizontally through the listing on the right while keeping time and delta visible on the left Figure 4 24 Tabular Format of the List Window It 10 x File Edit View Add Tools Window oe BS trei mrs psp ftest suint o delta ftest sm outats ftest sm rst a ftest sm clk 7 490000 0 iddasi L 1 HOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOLOLO 491000 1 OOOo00030 Ll HOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOoOOOOOOD 495000 0 OoOooo000 Ll NOOOOOOOOOOO000000000000 S00000 0 boooo0000 Ll 100
264. oo bar search for regions containing bar recursively below all top level regions containing foo To search for a name that contains the slash character escape the slash using a backslash For example Vbar ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 243 Window Reference Structure Window When you double click any item in the match list that item is highlighted in the Structure window and the popup is removed The search can be canceled by clicking on the x button in the popup window or by pressing the Esc key on your keyboard Filtering Structure Window Objects You can control the types of information available in the Structure window through the View gt Filter menu items Processes Implicit wire processes Functions Verilog and VHDL Functions Packages VHDL Packages Tasks Verilog Tasks Statement Verilog Statements VIPackage Verilog Packages VITypedef Verilog Type Definitions SV Class SystemVerilog class instances Cell Instances Verilog cell instances or VHDL architecture instance Capacity Memory capacity design unit Assertion VHDL and Verilog assertions Subprogram VHDL procedures and functions Verilog functions and tasks GUI Elements of the Structure Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window For a complete list of all columns in the Structure window and a description of their contents see Table 4 55 244 ModelSim SE GUI R
265. oooooooool oooooooooooooooooooooooal oooooooooooooooooooooooal oooccooooooooooooooo0000001 o0oooooooooooooooooooonal 0000000000000000000000001 E T p n A m A m G m Pie FP a af r re rejojr 531000 2 aieleleleqeeretelatateleleleteqeqeqejelaletele 0 535000 0 aieletutetarelefafefeleleleteterelelelalelel H 152 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference List Window Working with Markers The table below summarizes actions you can take with markers Table 4 33 Actions for Time Markers Method Add marker Select a line and then select List gt Add Marker Select a tagged line and then select List gt Delete Marker Goto marker Select View gt Goto gt lt time gt only available when undocked Expanded Time Viewing in the List Window Event time may be shown in the List window in the same manner as delta time by using the delta events option with the configure list command When the List window displays event times the event time is relative to events on other signals also displayed in the List window This may be misleading as it may not correspond to event times displayed in the Wave window for the same events if different signals are added to the Wave and List windows The write list command when used after the configure list delta events command writes a list file in tabular format with a line for every event Please note that this 1s different from the wr
266. oose to name the bookmark with an alias to provide a more meaningful description Aliases are displayed in the Alias column in the Manage Bookmarks dialog box e Selecting Options opens the Bookmark Options dialog box Figure 1 6 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General GUI Tasks Figure 1 6 Bookmark Options Dialog Box Options i x Display Max number of entries to show l20 Bookmark items should display lf Bookmark name V User defined alias I Window data Only if no alias is set M Show auto generated bookmarks Base name for bookmarks bookmark Automatically save bookmarks Never When windows are dosed When exiting the application I Restore bookmarks when windows open M Show informational messages after bookmark actions The Menu Display section allows you to o Set the number of bookmarks displayed in the Bookmarks menu or the Jump to Bookmark button menu o Select the types of information displayed for each bookmark The Other section allows you to o Specify a different base name for bookmarks o Choose whether you want to automatically save bookmarks and when they are saved o Automatically restore the bookmarks when windows are first loaded in the current session o Show informational message after bookmark actions sends bookmark actions to the transcript For example ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 23 Overview General GUI Tasks Bookmark s were
267. or Queued when a trigger occurs A process in the Wait state has been executed before but has been suspended and is now waiting for a trigger SystemC methods can have one of the four states Active Ready Idle or Queued When ScMethods are not being executed Active or scheduled Ready or Queued they are inactive Idle ScMethods execute in 0 time whenever they get triggered They are never suspended or terminated Process Type Definitions The Type column displays the process type according to the language used It includes the following types e Always e Assign e Final e Fork Join dynamic process like fork join sc_spawn and so forth e Initial Implicit internal processes created by simulator like Implicit wires and so forth e Primitive UDP Gates and so forth e ScMethod e ScThread SC Thread and SC CThread processes e VHDL Process Process Order Description The Order column displays the execution order of all processes in the Active and Ready states in the active kernel queue Processes that are not in the Active or Ready states do not yet have any order in which case the column displays a dash The Process window updates the execution order automatically as simulation proceeds 200 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Profiling Windows Use these five windows to view performance or memory profiling information about your simulation Calltree Displays information in a hierarchical f
268. ore GUI preferences elsewhere set the MODELSIM_PREFERENCES environment variable to designate where these preferences are stored Setting this variable causes ModelSim to use a specified path and file instead of the default location Here are some additional points to keep in mind about this variable setting e The file does not need to exist before setting the variable as ModelSim will initialize it If the file is read only ModelSim will not update or otherwise modify the file e This variable may contain a relative pathname in which case the file is relative to the working directory at the time the tool is started The modelsim tcl File Previous versions saved user GUI preferences into a modelsim tcl file Current versions will still read in a modelsim tcl file if it exists ModelSim searches for the file as follows e use MODELSIM_TCL environment variable if it exists Gf MODELSIM_ TCL is a list of files each file 1s loaded in the order that it appears in the list else e use modelsim tcl else e use HOME modelsim tcl if it exists Note that in versions 6 1 and later ModelSim will save to the modelsim file any variables it reads in from a modelsim tcl file except for user_hook variables The values from the modelsim tcl file will override like variables in the modelsim file User hook Variables You can create Tcl processes procs that add persistent user defined buttons and menus to the main window of ModelSim The Tcl
269. orm pane contains an analog waveform you can hover your mouse pointer over the left edge of the waveform to display the Analog Sidebar toolbox see Figure 4 99 This toolbox shows a group of icons that gives you quick access to actions you can perform on the waveform display as described in Table 4 62 Figure 4 99 Analog Sidebar Toolbox ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 275 Window Reference Wave Window Table 4 62 Analog Sidebar Icons Open Wave Properties Opens the Format tab of the Wave Properties dialog box with the Analog format already selected This dialog box duplicates the Wave Analog dialog box displayed by choosing Format gt Format gt Analog custom from the main menu Toggle Row Height Changes the height of the row that contains the analog waveform Toggles the height between the Min and Max values in pixels you specified in the Open Wave Properties dialog box under Analog Display Rescale to fit Y data Changes the waveform height so that it fits top to bottom within the current height of the row Show menu of other actions Displays e View Min Y e View Max Y Overlay Above Overlay Below Colorize All Colorize Selected Drag to resize waveform height Creates an up down dragging arrow that you can use to temporarily change the height of the row containing the analog waveform Cursor Pane Figure 4 100 shows the Cursor Pane which displays cursor names cursor values and the cursor locat
270. orm that indicates the call order dependencies of functions or routines Design Units Displays information aggregated for the different design units Ranked Displays information for each function or instance Structural Displays information aggregated for different instances Profile Details Displays detailed profiling information based on selections in the other Profile Windows Prerequisites You must have enabled performance or memory profiling Refer to the chapter Profiling Performance and Memory Use for more information Accessing Access the Profile Calltree window using either of the following Menu item View gt Profiling gt Call Tree Profile e Command view calltree Figure 4 55 Profile Calltree Window a oci fd T l _attach_process 2 i p Rrocvi39 _ isystF_calltf roc viag p lsysth_calltf cl DoOneEvent Tel WaitForE vent lt NoCallStack gt aU 0o o0 Oo eo 0o eo 07o eo 07o eo 0o eo 07o eo 07o 0 00 Access the Profile Design Unit window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Profiling gt Design Unit Profile ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 0 00 aU 0 0 0o eo Uo 0 0 0 00 007o eo 07o 00o Window Reference Profiling Windows e Command view du Figure 4 56 Profile Design Unit Window Design Units HT Fliame Count Lindergraw Ingraw _ Uinder p proc l _attach_proc F proc viga
271. ortion of a trigger configuration statement configure list usegating 1 configure list gateduration 100 configure list gateexpr test_delta iom_dd rising See the configure command for more details Sampling Signals at a Clock Change You easily can sample signals at a clock change using the add list command with the notrigger argument The notrigger argument disables triggering the display on the specified signals For example add list clk notrigger abc When you run the simulation List window entries for clk a b and c appear only when clk changes If you want to display on rising edges only you have two options 1 Turn off the List window triggering on the clock signal and then define a repeating strobe for the List window 2 Define a gating expression for the List window that requires the clock to be in a specified state See above 166 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference List Window Viewing Differences in the List Window The Waveform Compare feature allows you to compare simulation runs and display differences in the List window For a complete discussion of the Waveform Compare feature and how differences are displayed in both the Wave and List windows see Waveform Compare Other List Window Tasks List gt List Preferences Allows you to specify the preferences of the List window File gt Export gt Tabular List Exports the information in the List window to a file in t
272. orward through the current work history by using the vertical scrollbar You can also use arrow keys to recall previous commands or copy and paste using the mouse within the window see Main and Source Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts for details Displaying the Transcript Window The Transcript window is always open in the Main window and cannot be closed Viewing Data in the Transcript Window The Transcript tab contains the command line interface identified by the ModelSim prompt and the simulation interface identified by the VSIM prompt Saving the Transcript File Variable settings determine the filename used for saving the transcript If either PrefMain file in the modelsim file or TranscriptFile in the modelsim ini file is set then the transcript output is logged to the specified file By default the TranscriptFile variable in modelsim ini is set to transcript If either variable is set the transcript contents are always saved and no explicit saving is necessary If you would like to save an additional copy of the transcript with a different filename click in the Transcript window and then select File gt Save As or File gt Save The initial save must be made with the Save As selection which stores the filename in the Tcl variable PrefMain saveFile Subsequent saves can be made with the Save selection Since no automatic saves are performed for this file it is written only when you invoke a Save command The file is w
273. overage is recursive Deselect Code Coverage gt Enable Recursive Coverage Sums to view results for the local instance See Calculation of Total Coverage for coverage statistics details Transitions Files window the number of transitions encountered in each file Structure window the number of states encountered in each level and all levels subsumed under that level Transitions hit Files window the number of times the transitions were hit Structure window the number of times transitions 1n a level and each level under that level have been hit Transitions missed Files window the number of transitions in a file that were not hit Structure window the number of transitions in a level and all levels under that level that were not hit Transition the current ratio of Transition hits to Transition rows 248 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Structure Window Table 4 55 Columns in the Structure Window cont Column name Description Transition graph a bar chart displaying the State if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Visibility The acc settings used for compilation optimization of that design unit Top Category Column The Top Category column allows you to Determine which top level categories are is expanded with the initia
274. ow All Show None will also add a hide all note to the lower right hand corner e Hide Asynchronous Only e Combine Common Transitions default creates a single transition for any transitions to reset that use the same condition The transition is Shown from a gray diamond that acts as a placeholder Options Displays the FSM Display Options dialog box which allows you to control e how FSM information is added to the Wave Window e how much information is shown in the Instance Column ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 141 Instance Coverage Window Use this window to analyze coverage statistics for each instance in a flat non hierarchical view You can sort data columns to be more meaningful and not be confused by hierarchy This window contains the same code coverage statistics columns as in the Files and Structure windows Prerequisites This window is specific to the collection of coverage metrics therefore you must have run your simulation with coverage collection enabled Refer to the chapter Code Coverage for more information Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item View gt Coverage gt Instance Coverage e Command view instance Figure 4 21 Instance Coverage Window Instance Coverage H wlinstance Design unit _ Design unit type Stmts hit _ Stmts missed _ stmt F itest smi test sm Module 70 J oftest_smism_seqg0 sm_seq Module 16 15 J oft
275. ow Reference Memory Data Window Table 4 39 Memory Data Popup Menu Data Pane through the use of the Change Memory dialog box Import Data Patterns Allows you to import data patterns into the selected memory through the Import Memory dialog box Export Data Patterns Allows you to export data patterns from the selected memory through the Export Memory dialog box Split Screen Split Screen Refer to items in the Memory Data Popup Menu Address Pane Properties Close Instance Close All Memory Data Menu This menu becomes available in the Main menu when the Memory Data window is active Table 4 40 Memory Data Menu Popup Menu Tiem Memory Declaration Opens a Source window to the file and line number where the memory is declared Compare Contents Allows you to compare the selected memory against another memory in the design or an external file Import Data Patterns Import Data Patterns Patterns Refer to items in the Memory Data Popup Menu Data Pane Export Data Patterns Expand Packed Memories Toggle the expansion of packed memories Identify Memories Within Toggle the identification of memories within Verilog Cells cells Show VHDL String as Toggle the identification of VHDL strings as Memory memories Split Screen Refer to items in the Memory Data Popup Menu Address Pane ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 175 Memory List Window Use this window to view a list of all memories i
276. p Toolbar Wave Cursor Toolbar Wave Edit Toolbar Wave Toolbar Wave Compare Toolbar Zoom Toolbar Wave Expand Time Toolbar ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Specific Keyboard Shortcuts Chapter 5 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions You can open a dynamic list of common pre defined and user defined keyboard shortcuts for many windows by entering Ctrl on your keyboard Figure 5 1 shows the keyboard shortcuts for the Source window Figure 5 1 Keyboard Shortcuts for Source Window You can find a complete list of all keyboard shortcuts predefined and user defined by clicking View All Shortcuts Refer to User Defined Keyboard Shortcuts for more information on how to create a customized shortcut The following windows have keyboard shortcuts assigned Dataflow Window Library Window Objects Window Schematic Window Source Window Structure Window Transcript Window Wave Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 281 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions User Defined Keyboard Shortcuts User Defined Keyboard Shortcuts In addition to the predefined keyboard shortcuts you can create your own shortcuts or modify predefined keyboard shortcuts with the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box Figure 5 2 Shortcuts can be either window specific available only when the window is active or global available from anywhere in the tool You can create a keyboard shortcut for any window in ModelSim Once
277. place thorough knowledge of coding They are intended as an interactive reference for creating small sections of code If you are unfamiliar with a particular language you should attend a training class or consult one of the many available books To use the templates either open an existing file or select File gt New gt Source to create a new file Once the file is open select Source gt Show Language Templates if the Source window is docked in the Main window select View gt Show Language Templates of the Source window is undocked Figure 4 73 Language Templates IH Ci fexanmples Untitled 1 vhd T Language Constructs Stimulus Generators H Untitled 1 vhd slal The template that appears depends on the type of file you create For example Module and Primitive templates are available for Verilog files and Entity and Architecture templates are available for VHDL files VHDL Verilog and SystemVerilog language templates display the following options a New Design Wizard Opens the Create New Design Wizard dialog Figure 4 74 The New Design Wizard will step you through the tasks necessary to add a VHDL Design Unit or Verilog Module to your code b Create Testbench Opens the Create Testbench Wizard dialog The Create Testbench Wizard allows you to create a testbench for a previously compiled design unit in your library It generates code that instantiates your design unit and wires it up inside a top lev
278. ponding element of Expression Syntax and is displayed in the Expression field In addition you can use the Selected Signal button to create an expression from signals you select from the List window For example instead of typing in a signal name you can select signals in a List window and then click Selected Signal in the Expression Builder This displays the Select Signal for Expression dialog box shown in Figure 4 33 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 157 Window Reference List Window Figure 4 33 Selecting Signals for Expression Builder Select Signal for Expression i x Signals List only Select Signals List All Signals Note that the buttons in this dialog box allow you to determine the display of signals you want to put into an expression List only Select Signals list only those signals that are currently selected in the parent window List All Signals list all signals currently available in the parent window Once you have selected the signals you want displayed in the Expression Builder click OK Saving an Expression to a Tcl Variable Clicking the Save button will save the expression to a Tcl variable Once saved this variable can be used in place of the expression For example say you save an expression to the variable foo Here are some operations you could do with the saved variable Read the value of foo with the set command set foo e Put foo in the Expression entry box for the Se
279. press changes the pattern and restarts the search immediately Figure 4 83 Find Mode Popup Displays Matches 2 BUFIF1 1 etc Process acc lt g ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt R Search results 8 found top p 10 BUuF 24 top p 11 BUF FT ftop p 1l1 OR 46 cop p ORAS S ror 3 SearchFor Aa D fa M i Meer A Fr The Structure window Find bar supports hierarchical searching to limit the regions of a search The forward slash character is used to separate the search words A double slash is used to specify a recursive search from the double slash down the hierarchy For example foo search the entire design space for regions containing foo in the name foo bar search the entire design space for regions containing foo then any single alphanumeric character followed by bar foo bar search the design for a name containing foo a string of zero or more alphanumeric characters followed by bar For example to following names match a search for foo bar foobar foo _fred_bar and foolsAbar foolSbad does not match the search string foo search the top of the design hierarchy for regions containing foo foo bar search for regions containing foo at the top and then regions containing bar f
280. r expression In the case of a multi line condition statement this is the last line of the statement Condition Expression Coverage for the syntax of the condition FEC Coverage a tabular representation of the focused expression coverage metrics to satisfy the condition Refer to the section FEC Coverage Detailed Examples for more information about FEC condition expression coverage You can exclude rows or rows by instance through a popup menu accessible by right clicking on a row in the table see Figure 4 11 UDP Coverage not included in the Details window unless coverudp was specified with vcom vlog vopt Refer to the section UDP Coverage Details and Examples for more information about UDP condition expression coverage ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 115 Window Reference Coverage Details Window Figure 4 11 Coverage Details Window Showing Expression Truth Table Coverage Details Be A Instance sim test sm sm_seqU sm_0 File sm w Line 40 Expression Coverage for wire a wen_ a tate 2 state 4 atate S FEC Coverage 3 out of 3 input terms covered 100 0 Input Terminal Covered state 2 state 4 state 9 Hits FEC Target Matching Input Patternis Rightclick on row to ea See ee ee Hae ee eee pop up menu S40001 state Z2 0 nnn SOO00 state Z 1 Exclude row S40001 state 4 O 40000 state 4 71 Exclude row by instance B40001 state 9
281. r is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Condition rows Files window the number of conditions in each file Structure window the number of conditions in each level and all levels under that level Conditions hit Files window the number of times the conditions 1n a file have been executed Structure window the number of times the conditions in a level and all levels under that level have been executed Conditions missed Files window the number of conditions in a file that were not executed Structure window the number of conditions in a level and all levels under that level that were not executed Condition the current ratio of Condition hits to Condition rows ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 245 Window Reference Structure Window Table 4 55 Columns in the Structure Window cont Column name Description Condition graph a bar chart displaying the Condition if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Covergroup the number of hits from the total number of covergroups as a percentage Cover hits the number of cover directives whose count values are greater than or equal to the at_least value Cover misses the number of cover directives whose count values ar
282. r the name such as 2 Saving Memory Formats in a DO File You can save all open memory instances and their formats for example address radix data radix and so forth by creating a DO file 1 Select the Memory List window 2 Select File gt Save Format displays the Save Memory Format dialog box 3 Enter the file name in the Save memory format dialog box By default it is named mem do The file will contain all open memory instances and their formats To load it at a later time select File gt Load Saving Memories to the WLF File By default memories are not saved in the WLF file when you issue a log r command To get memories into the WLF file you will need to explicitly log them For example log top dut i0 mem It you want to use wildcards then you will need to remove memories from the WildcardFilter list To see what is currently in the WildcardFilter list use the following command set WildcardFilter If Memories is in the list reissue the set WildcardFilter command with all items in the list except Memories For details see Using the WildcardFilter Preference Variable Note For post process debug you can add the memories into the Wave or List windows but the Memory List window is not available GUI Elements of the Memory List Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 179 Window Reference Memory L
283. rdy 0 0 UU U DOOUUOU DUO U U U DOU Ol OUUU UM T ETE TTT tee HU 0 U DOOUUO0D DUO U U U DOU Ol 5 0 NO 1 1 00000000 4fe4e2eee2ee42424222 0 1 1 OOOU0000 44222 a ap NO 1 1 00000000 ZZZZZ2Z2AAAAA Aa 0 1 1 0000 0 2422 Bape MO 1 1 OUN00000 ZZZZZZZZ2Z2LAA2a O L 1 0000 ZZZZZ i ara NO 1 1 00000000 ZZZZZ2Z2AAAA AAA O 1 1 OOO00000 424222 z0 0 M O 1 1 00QOQOOD zzdazddaddadaadda Q 1 1 OOUOOO000 22222 O 1 Mo 1 1 00000000 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ O l 1 00000000 ZZZZZ a l moO 0 1 00000000D ZZZZZZ2AAAAA jaa 0 1 1 0 0 Saee e F16 lines 4 List Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the List window Adding Data to the List Window You can add objects to the List window in any of the following ways e right clicking on signals and objects in the Objects window or the Structure window and selecting Add gt to List using the add list command using the Add Selected to Window Button ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 151 Window Reference List Window Selecting Multiple Signals To create a larger group of signals and assign a new name to this group do the following 1 Select a group of signals o Shift click on signal columns to select a range of signals o Control click on signal columns to select a group of specific signals 2 Select List gt Combine Signals 3 Complete the Combine Selected Signals dialog box o Name Specify the name you want to appear as the name of the ne
284. riate instance You can then access textual connectivity information in the Source window by right clicking any signal This opens a popup menu that gives you the choices shown in Figure Figure 4 70 Figure 4 70 Popup Menu Choices for Textual Dataflow Information j C examples tutorials verilog dataflow proc v jtop p Defaut n WEE Ln g o 22 wire t out t set rw out StX Sti Str 23 wire addr size 1 0 5 Bf 41 000 Open Instance 24 a see 1 0 5 dat Ascend Enw wire word size 1 0 3 dat ar r 000 Forward b 254 Wire 5 rw _ Add sti 26 Cut Col4 x Copy Cil c 27 wire test test2 rw test in ise sie pa Pa oe Ctrl4 F StX StX S5t0 Hiz 28 z9 not Ew I sto lt 30 and i0 31 y test StX The Event Traceback gt Show Driver selection causes the Source window to jump to the source code defining the driver of the selected signal If the Driver is in a different Source file that file will open in a new Source window tab and the driver code will be highlighted You can also jump to the driver of a signal by simply double clicking the signal ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 225 Window Reference Source Window If there is more than one driver for the signal a Multiple Drivers dialog will open showing all driving processes Figure 4 71 Figure 4 71 Window Shows all Driving Processes Multiple Drivers if x Multiple active drivers were Found while backtraci
285. ritten to the specified directory and records the contents of the transcript at the time of the save Refer to Creating a Transcript File for more information about creating locating and saving a transcript file Saving a Transcript File as a Macro DO file 1 Open a saved transcript file in a text editor 2 Remove all commented lines leaving only the lines with commands ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 254 Window Reference Transcript Window 3 Save the file as lt name gt do Refer to the do command for information about executing a DO file Changing the Number of Lines Saved in the Transcript Window By default the Transcript window retains the last 5000 lines of output from the transcript You can change this default by selecting Transcript gt Saved Lines Setting this variable to 0 instructs the tool to retain all lines of the transcript Colorizing the Transcript By default all Transcript window messages are printed in blue You may colorized Transcript messages according to severity as follows l Select Tools gt Edit Preferences from the Main window menus In the Preferences window select the By Name tab Expand the list of Preferences under Main 2 3 4 5 Select the colorizeTranscript preference and click the Change Value button Enter 1 in the Change Main Preference Value dialog and click OK Figure 4 87 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 255 Window Reference Tra
286. rsor to the Transition Hotkey Tab next signal value change for the selected signal Find Menu Edit gt Signal Search Moves the active cursor to the Previous previous falling edge for the Falling Edge selected signal selected signal Find Menu Edit gt Signal Search Moves the active cursor to the 4 Previous previous rising edge for the Rising Edge selected signal Find Next Menu Edit gt Signal Search Moves the active cursor to the ea Rising Edge next rising edge for the Find Next Menu Edit gt Signal Search Moves the active cursor to the Falling Edge next falling edge for the selected signal ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Uf Toolbars Wave Edit Toolbar Wave Edit Toolbar The Wave Edit toolbar provides easy access to tools for modifying an editable wave Figure 3 27 Wave Edit Toolbar wh ej Ae Mn Rag a UE a Table 3 25 Wave Edit Toolbar Buttons Insert Pulse Menu Wave gt Insert a transition at the Wave Editor gt Insert Pulse selected time Command wave edit E insert_pulse Delete Edge Menu Wave gt Delete the selected transition 1 Wave Editor gt Delete Edge Command wave edit delete 7 Invert Menu Wave gt Invert the selected section of Tar Wave Editor gt Invert the waveform Command wave edit invert Mirror Menu Wave gt Mirror the selected section of In Wave Editor gt Mirror the waveform Command wave edit mirror Change Menu Wave gt Change the v
287. s Full Path The full path location of the design files Branch info A series of columns reporting branch coverage Condition info A series of columns reporting condition coverage Expression info A series of columns reporting expression coverage FEC condition info A series of columns reporting condition coverage based on Focused Expression Coverage FEC expression info A series of columns reporting expression coverage based on Focused Expression Coverage States info A series of columns reporting finite state machine coverage Statement info A series of columns reporting statement coverage Toggles info A series of columns reporting toggle coverage Transition info A series of columns reporting transition coverage Refer to Table 4 55 Columns in the Structure Window for detailed information about the coverage metric columns 130 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Files Window Popup Menu Right click anywhere in the window to display the popup menu and select one of the following options Table 4 21 Files Window Popup Menu Opens the selected file in a Source window Open in external editor Opens the selected file in an external editor Only available if you have set the Editor preference set PrefMain Editor lt path_to_executable gt Tools gt Edit Preferences by Name tab Main group Code Coverage gt These menu items are only available if you ran the simulation with th
288. s Figure 1 18 shows the Wave window with its the three panes ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 35 Overview General Visual Elements Figure 1 18 Wave Window Panes tz it ave gt COP py cir Cl L LOI ay E 4 ftepipidy o aman m ftop pfaddr 0001001 0001001 itopipiew t1 OOO a frop p data oooooo000001001 looOOnOoooooo1oo1 gA ltopipiaddr_r 0001001 0001001 r a itopipidata_ 2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ aaococoiogi 4 jtopipiw y Pathname Value Pane Topipit set A ftop p irw_out itopipitest 4 itopipitestz be topipi rm tO itopipitest in iz sg ftopipla 0001010 oono0010 itopipid oo0o00000001001 oo00000 Io00000 ftopipfimo r I EE i l EEE i eh is STS he ial Lalla E 5 2100 ns 2200 ns H l Main Window Status Bar Fields at the bottom of the Main window provide the following information about the current simulation Figure 1 19 Main Window Status Bar Project rtl Mow Uns Delta U sim Aop p A Table 1 4 Information Displayed in Status Bar name of the current project the current simulation time 36 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Overview General Visual Elements Table 1 4 Information Displayed in Status Bar cont the current simulation iteration number Profile Samples the number of profile samples collected during the current simulation the total memory used during the current simulation environment name of the current context object s
289. selected object s to any one of the following Wave window List window Log file Schematic window Dataflow window You may choose to add only the Selected Signals all Signals in Region all Signals in Design Copies the object instance path to the clipboard Find Opens the Search Bar at bottom of window in the Find mode to make searching for objects easier especially with large designs Code Coverage gt These menu items are only available when you run the simulation with the coverage switch e Code Coverage Reports Opens the Coverage Text Report dialog e Clear Code Coverage Data Clears all code coverage information collected during simulation Enable Recursive Coverage Sums Displays coverage data and graphs for each design object or file recursively enabled by default Test Analysis When a UCDB file is selected allows you to do the following Find Tests with Least Coverage e Most Coverage Zero Coverage Non Zero Coverage Rank Most Effective Tests Summary XML Import Hint Displays the XML Import Hint dialog box with information about the Link Type and Name ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 241 Window Reference Structure Window Table 4 54 Structure Window Popup Menu cont Popup Menu Ten Show Lists the design unit types that are currently displayed e Processes Functions Packages Tasks Statement VPackages VITypedef SVClass Class Instances Capacity Change Filt
290. signal TE will be used For this signal in all windows Mone fuse session default Symbolic Binary Octal Decimal Unsigned Hexadecimal ASCII Time ee ceeeen OK Cancel Apply The data in this pane is similar to that shown in the Objects Window except that the values change dynamically whenever a cursor in the waveform pane is moved Figure 4 97 Values Pane ee ARANA SEO stl Waveform Pane Figure 4 98 shows waveform pane which displays waveforms that correspond to the displayed signal pathnames It can also display as many as 20 user defined cursors Signal values can be displayed in analog step analog interpolated analog backstep literal logic and event formats You can set the format of each signal individually by right clicking the signal in the pathname or values panes and choosing Format from the popup menu The default format is Logic 274 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Wave Window If you place your mouse pointer on a signal in the waveform pane a popup menu displays with information about the signal You can toggle this popup on and off in the Wave Window Properties dialog box Dashed signal lines in the waveform pane indicate weak or ambiguous strengths of Verilog states See Verilog States in the Mixed Language Simulation chapter ere 4 98 Waveform Pane oH Eh T ra E sin test su rdn 4 529 ns E Analog Sidebar Toolbox When the wavef
291. sing the Code Coverage column view setting refer to Controlling the Verification Browser Columns for more information Figure 4 90 Browser Tab 2 Verification Management Browse _ _ FileName TestName TotalCoverage Statements Branches Expressions Conditions ToggleNades States fu CPURegisterTestucdb CPURegister PLIT fo 63 67 69 90 34 36 4ra 100 U DataTestucdb DataTest agit 7 70 33 no 24 ace 30 04 a7 06 de U FifoTestucdh FifoTest AGF Po B46 Bile 34 14 45 41 76 fu IntialTestucdb lntialTest 46 01 72 03 64 12 64 2 34 00 42 19 76 ful MadeTwoTestucdh MadelTwore 47 34 Taa B4 0 65 60 34 79 41 47 FB M results ucdb 74 26 934 54 30 65 TTJ 4 64 Faga 100 U TsDataTest ucdh TxDataTest 46 13 73 05 64 57 BEAS 34 79 4245 T u VariableTest ucdb VariableTest 46 12 Feng 64 12 64 63 34 00 43 04 FB E E 88 Brovser E statment Branch E Consion J Bresson Toga E FM ES Ceac JA Cove Verification Browser Icons The Browser uses the following icons to identify the type of file loaded into the browser Table 4 56 Verification Browser Icons Browser Icon Description Indicates the file is an unmerged UCDB file A P notation in the upper right hand corner of the icon indicates that a Verification Plan is included in UCDB Indicates the file is a rank file ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 259 Window Reference Verificati
292. sociative Arrays Registers Solver System task instances Task instances ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Capacity Window e Verilog Memories e Verilog Ports When your design contains VHDL design units you will see the following entries in the Type Object column Instances Ports Signals e Processes ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 99 Class Graph Window The Class Graph window provides a graphical view of your SystemVerilog classes including any extensions of other classes and related methods and properties Accessing e Menu item View gt Class Browser gt Class Graph e Command view classgraph Figure 4 5 Class Graph Window th_packet Properties bit 47 0 dest bit 47 0 sre bit 15 0 ethertype int payload_sz byte lt sid gt 1517 payload int ifg bit 31 0 fcs bit 31 0 foes corrupt bit mac plus bit any_payld_size bit sm_payld_size bit r eg_payld_size bit huge_payld_size bit basic short_ifa reg _ifg foes gen Class Graph Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Cover Directives window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 100 Window Reference Class Graph Window Navigating in the Class Graph Window You can change the view of the Class Graph window with your mouse or the arrow keys on your keyboard Left click drag allows you to move the contents around in the window e Midd
293. source code in whole or in part including any of its methods or concepts to anyone except Customer s employees or on site contractors excluding Mentor Graphics competitors with a need to know Customer shall not copy or compile source code in any manner except to support this authorized use 5 3 Customer may not assign this Agreement or the rights and duties under it or relocate sublicense or otherwise transfer the Products whether by operation of law or otherwise Attempted Transfer without Mentor Graphics prior written consent and payment of Mentor Graphics then current applicable relocation and or transfer fees Any Attempted Transfer without Mentor Graphics prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may at Mentor Graphics option result in the immediate termination of the Agreement and or the licenses granted under this Agreement The terms 10 11 of this Agreement including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions shall be binding upon Customer s permitted successors in interest and assigns 5 4 The provisions of this Section 5 shall survive the termination of this Agreement SUPPORT SERVICES To the extent Customer purchases support services Mentor Graphics will provide Customer with updates and technical support for the Products at the Customer site s for which support is purchased in accordance with Mentor Graphics then current End User Support Terms
294. specified by applicable and mandatory local law Customer shall not reverse assemble reverse compile reverse engineer or in any way derive any source code from Software Log files data files rule files and script files generated by or for the Software collectively Files including without limitation files containing Standard Verification Rule Format SVRF and Tcl Verification Format TVF which are Mentor Graphics proprietary syntaxes for expressing process rules constitute or include confidential information of Mentor Graphics Customer may share Files with third parties excluding Mentor Graphics competitors provided that the confidentiality of such Files is protected by written agreement at least as well as Customer protects other information of a similar nature or importance but in any case with at least reasonable care Customer may use Files containing SVRF or TVF only with Mentor Graphics products Under no circumstances shall Customer use Software or Files or allow their use for the purpose of developing enhancing or marketing any product that is in any way competitive with Software or disclose to any third party the results of or information pertaining to any benchmark 5 2 If any Software or portions thereof are provided in source code form Customer will use the source code only to correct software errors and enhance or modify the Software for the authorized use Customer shall not disclose or permit disclosure of
295. ssages Time Process Region H Misc 42 Note 42 fel 20 ns Starting Read Write test z0 ns 0 line 74 fkopip fm 20 ns Writing daka 0000000000000000 l to addr 00000000 z0 nsi 0 line_74 itopip fm 60 ns Write mis picking set 3 60 nsi 0 line_64 fkopyec ae 220 nsi O0 line 74 stopp je 260 ns Write mis picking set 3 460 ns 0 line__ 4 topic fm 420 ns Writing datka 0000000000000010 to addr 00000010 420 ns 0 line_74 itopip A 460 ns Write mis picking set 3 460 ns 0 line__84 ltopic fan 620 ns Writing data 000000000000001 1 to addr 0000001 1 620 nsi 0 line 74 ltopip fel 660 ns write mis picking set 3 660 nsf 0 line 84 topic fan 820 ns Writing data 0000000000000100 Fo add r nnnnni nan S20 ns 0 line 74 ltopip Message Viewer Window Tasks Figure 4 46 and Table 4 45 provide an overview of the Message Viewer and several tasks you can perform ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 183 Window Reference Message Viewer Window Figure 4 46 Message Viewer Window Tasks Column Headings Right click to view heading options Lett click to toggle sort order hiessage lewer E blise 2 mN Hote 1 A waming 1 Ce vam 3473 Component instance u7 vdogbuf2 ie not bound M73 Or 0 top top whid SDF 2 JA Warning 2 r a ang eat fap ary pe ais aberar doss 0 re best adi 18 as Waning SDF 3240 tact SENEE Erti Mhdichk dogs 40 Ons nal have a generic named telup
296. stomer or if agreed by Mentor Graphics Customer s appointed third party buying agent places and Mentor Graphics accepts purchase orders pursuant to this Agreement Order s each Order will constitute a contract between Customer and Mentor Graphics which shall be governed solely and exclusively by the terms and conditions of this Agreement any applicable addenda and the applicable quotation whether or not these documents are referenced on the Order Any additional or conflicting terms and conditions appearing on an Order or presented via any electronic portal or other automated order management system will not be effective unless agreed in writing by an authorized representative of Customer and Mentor Graphics 1 2 Amounts invoiced will be paid in the currency specified on the applicable invoice within 30 days from the date of such invoice Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one half percent per month or the applicable legal rate currently in effect whichever is lower Prices do not include freight insurance customs duties taxes or other similar charges which Mentor Graphics will state separately in the applicable invoice s Unless timely provided with a valid certificate of exemption or other evidence that items are not taxable Mentor Graphics will invoice Customer for all applicable taxes including but not limited to VAT GST sales tax consumption tax and service
297. t ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 265 Watch Window Use the Watch window to view values for signals and variables at the current simulation time and to explore the hierarchy of object oriented designs Unlike the Objects or Locals windows the Watch window allows you to view any signal or variable in the design regardless of the current context You can view the following objects VHDL objects signals aliases generics constants and variables Verilog objects nets registers variables named events and module parameters SystemC objects primitive channels and ports Virtual objects virtual signals and virtual functions Accessing Access the window using either of the following Menu item View gt Watch Command view watch Figure 4 91 Watch Window am_th spram data_in Oxff020fb8 Limem 0xff7053230 MEU T le lane es 0 00010001100101000 1 00010001100101001 2 00010001100101010 ram_tb spram4j mem Oxff0529b0 3 00010001100101011 0 4 3 4 00010001100101100 0 4 3 5 000 10001100101101 2 4 3 6 00010001100101110 3 3 7 00010001100101111 8 00010001100110000 9 000 10001100110001 00000 1z 10 00010001100110010 11 00010001100110011 12 00010001100110100 13 00010001100110101 fa 14 00010001100110110 15 00010001100110111 16 00010001100111000 sim ram_th i OxffO1d590 am 1 data
298. t Tools gt Window Preferences from the List window menu bar when the window is undocked and select the Triggers tab 2 Click the Use Expression Builder button Figure 4 39 Trigger Gating Using Expression Builder Expression Builder x oo Expression Builder event rising Falling AMD OR afa xor suj x z sa sra H Clear Save Test OK Cancel ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 165 Window Reference List Window 3 Select the signal in the List window that you want to be the enable signal by clicking on its name in the header area of the List window 4 Click Insert Selected Signal and then rising in the Expression Builder 5 Click OK to close the Expression Builder You should see the name of the signal plus rising added to the Expression entry box of the Modify Display Properties dialog box 6 Click OK to close the dialog If you already have simulation data in the List window the display should immediately switch to showing only those cycles for which the gating signal is rising If that isn t quite what you want you can go back to the expression builder and play with it until you get it the way you want it If you want the enable signal to work like a One Shot that would display all values for the next say 10 ns after the rising edge of enable then set the On Duration value to 10 ns Trigger Gating Example Using Commands The following commands show the gating p
299. t expressly granted by this Agreement Mentor Graphics grants to Customer subject to payment of applicable license fees a nontransferable nonexclusive license to use Software solely a in machine readable object code form except as provided in Subsection 5 2 b for Customer s internal business purposes c for the term of the license and d on the computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics A site is restricted to a one half mile 800 meter radius Customer may have Software temporarily used by an employee for telecommuting purposes from locations other than a Customer office such as the employee s residence an airport or hotel provided that such employee s primary place of employment is the site where the Software is authorized for use Mentor Graphics standard policies and programs which vary depending on Software license fees paid or services purchased apply to the following a relocation of Software b use of Software which may be limited for example to execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time such limitations may be technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices and c support services provided including eligibility to receive telephone support updates modifications and revisions For the avoidance of doubt if Customer provides any feedback or requests any change or enhancement to Products
300. tandard Toolbar PRA ELIEL PEH 70 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Standard Toolbar Table 3 20 Standard Toolbar Buttons New File Menu File gt New gt Source Opens a new Source text file T The icon changes to reflect the default file type set with the Set Default Action menu pick from the dropdown menu Click and hold the button to open a dropdown menu with the following options VHDL Verilog SystemC SystemVerilog Set Default Action Menu File gt Open Opens the Open File dialog Save Menu File gt Save Saves the contents of the active window or Saves the current wave window display and signal preferences to a macro file DO fie a Reload Command Dataset Restart Reload the current dataset Menu File gt Datasets aro Menu File gt Print Opens the Print dialog box Menu Edit gt Cut Hotkey Ctrl x pe Copy Menu Edit gt Copy Hotkey Ctrl c Paste Menu Edit gt Paste fe Hotkey Ctrl v Undo Menu Edit gt Undo wt Hotkey Ctrl z ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 71 Toolbars Standard Toolbar Table 3 20 Standard Toolbar Buttons cont Redo Menu Edit gt Redo a Hotkey Ctrl y Add Selected Menu Add gt to Wave Clicking adds selected objects to Window Hotkey Ctrl w to the Wave window Refer to Add Selected to Window Button for more information about the dropdown menu selections Set Default Action Menu Edit gt Find Opens the Find di
301. tarting a simulation You can also open the Structure window with the View Objects Window Button The hierarchical view includes an entry for each object within the design When you select an object in a Structure window it becomes the current region By default the coverage statistics displayed in the columns within the Structure window are recursive You can select to view coverage statistics for local instances by deselecting Code Coverage gt Enable Recursive Coverage Sums Refer to Coverage Aggregation in the Structure Window for details on coverage numbers The contents of several windows automatically update based on which object you select including the Source window Objects window Processes window and Locals window All mouse button operations clear the current selection and select the item under the cursor Accessing Access the window using any of the following Menu item View gt Structure e Command view structure Button View Objects Window Button ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 239 Window Reference Structure Window Figure 4 82 Structure Window amp sim Default Go lew Ea See a ee al top fast acc lt E p proc fast acc lt af read proc fast 3 acc lt gj write proc fast 3 acc lt l g io and2 fast o acc lt ae g ii or2 fast adul acc lt ee y i2 v_and2 fast Modul acc lt ASSIGN 2 proc fast Process acc lt g A
302. tatistics details the current ratio of Transition hits to Transition rows Transition graph a bar chart displaying the State if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable UDP Condition a bar chart displaying the Condition if the percentage is below 90 graph the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable UDP Condition the number of UDP conditions in each instance rows UDP Conditions hit the number of times the UDP conditions in an instance that have been executed UDP Conditions the number of conditions in an instance that were not executed missed UDP Expression the current ratio of UDP Expression hits to UDP Expression rows 146 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Instance Coverage Window Table 4 29 Columns in the Instance Coverage Window cont Column name Description UDP Expression a bar chart displaying the UDP Expression if the percentage is below graph 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable UDP Expression the number of executable UDP expressions in each level and all levels rows subsumed under that level UDP Expressions the number of ti
303. tents 20 0 eee eee eee 174 Figure 4 44 Memory LIst Window 0 0 eens 178 Figure 4 45 Message Viewer Window 02 ees 183 Figure 4 46 Message Viewer Window Tasks 0 0 e ee eens 184 Figure 4 47 Message Viewer Filter Dialog Box 1 2 0 0 cee eee 189 Figure 4 48 Objects Window 6 2 eee eee eee eens 190 Figure 4 49 Setting the Global Signal Radix from the Objects Window 191 Figure 4 50 Objects Window Toggle Coverage 0 0 ce eee 194 Fioure 4 51 Processes WINdOW scndceneengeeanee enero neeuueadaseeeeae see amend 196 Figure 4 52 Column Heading Changes When States are Filtered 197 Figure 4 53 Next Active Process Displayed in Order Column 198 Figure 4 54 Sample Process Report in the Transcript Window 0 198 Figure 4 55 Profile Calltree Window 2 0 0 ce eee eens 201 Figure 4 56 Profile Design Unit Window 0 cc ccc cee eens 202 Figure 4 57 Profile Ranked Window 0 ccc ee een nee eens 202 Figure 4 58 Profile Structural Window 0 0 ccc ene eens 203 Figure 4 59 Profile Details Window 0 0 ene eens 203 Figure 4 60 Schematic View Indicator 0 0 0 ec een eee eens 206 Figure 4 61 Schematic Window 2 0 ee ene ene eens 207 Figure 4 62 Code Preview Window 0 een nee ees 209 Figure 4 63 Incremental Schematic Options Di
304. the last line of the statement e Statement Coverage for name of the statement itself Hits the number of times the statement was hit during the simulation If a line number contains multiple statements the coverage details window contains the metrics for each statement Coverage Details of Branch Coverage The Coverage Details window displays the following information about Branch Coverage metrics Instance the dataset name followed by the hierarchical location of the branch Only appears when you are analyzing coverage metrics by instance e File the name of the file containing the statement ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 114 Window Reference Coverage Details Window Line the line number of the statement In the case of a multi line branch statement this 1s the last line of the statement Branch Coverage for the statement itself o Active the number of times the branch has been executed o True Hits the number of times the branch resolved to True Coverage Details of Condition and Expression Coverage The Coverage Details window displays the following information about Condition and Expression Coverage metrics Instance the dataset name followed by the hierarchical location of the condition Only appears when you are analyzing coverage metrics by instance File the filename containing the condition Line the line number of the filename containing the condition o
305. the Simulator GUI Layout 0 0 0 0 0 eee nee 293 Layout Mode Loading Priority 0 0 0 eee eens 293 Configure Window Layouts Dialog BOX 0 0 ees 294 Creating a Custom Layout Mode 0406s 2cee0ddedeetedieeerenddudeetedioeecs 294 Changing Layout Mode Behavior 0 0 0 cc ccc nets 294 Resetting a Layout Mode to its Default 2 0 ce ene 295 Deleting a Custom Layout Mode 0 0 eens 295 Configuring Default Windows for Restored Layouts 20 00 cee eee eee 295 Configuring the Column Layout 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee ees 296 User Defined Buttons and Menus 0 eee nee eens 297 User Delined Radite lt 4 sacenotede tomea lt weap hod 104 ewe ss weap EES 299 Using the radix define Command 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eens 299 Chapter 7 CU PREV ONces 255 E ae ondeeeedceusseaiaes 305 Simulator GUI Preferences 0 0 0 eee teen eens 305 Setting Preference Variables from the GUI 2 0 0 0 es 305 Setting Preference Variables from the Command Line 0000s 307 Savne GULPER Se osc date ceoeceetadede ene SAE ENSEDE SERENAS apcean ss 308 The modelsimAcl Pues ccicccdicesgestaveicasdiceagersaricivavddesagans ada 308 GUIL Preference Vanables ssi ctaccasieeeead TN EDERE ARRESE E dbaetaudeaanas oe 310 Wave Window Variables 0 0 0 ee ene e eens 310 Modifying Wave Window Variables from the Command Line 312 Index End User License
306. the simulator is invoked with the assertdebug option or the ini file variable AssertionDebug is set to 1 Action Allows you to take specified actions when the selected assertions meet certain conditions Test Analysis When a UCDB file is selected allows you to Find Tests with Least Coverage Most Coverage Zero Coverage or Non Zero Coverage Rank Most Effective Tests produce a Summary report XML Import Hint Displays the XML Import Hint dialog box with information about the Link Type and Name Filter Setup Opens Filter Setup dialog Apply Applies filter to selected item s Expand or collapse the hierarchy Display Options Allows you to control the appearance of information in the window Exclude Selected Excludes selected item s from coverage statistics collection and reports Clear Exclusion Clears coverage exclusion for selected item s 90 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c ATV Window Use this window to view the progress of assertion threads PSL and SystemVerilog assertions over time Accessing Access the window using either of the following e Menu item Assertions gt Add ATV when selecting an assertion in the Assertions Window e Command add atv Refer to the section Viewing Assertion Threads in the ATV Window for detailed instructions ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 91 Window Reference ATV Window Figure 4 2 ATV Window A AssertionThreadview froplaye
307. the test was run the test date the test was run run the number of FEC conditions in each level and all levels under that level FecExpressions the number of executable FEC expressions in each level and all levels subsumed under that level OriginalFileName UCDB filename SimTime total simulation time simulation time zem ee number of executable statements in each level and all levels under that UCDB States the number of states encountered in each level and all levels subsumed under that UCDB ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 261 XxxxIncr AssertionsIncr BranchesIncr CoversIncr etc Window Reference Verification Management Browser Window Table 4 57 Verification Management Browser Window Column Descriptions TestStatus status status of the test the test the number of points in the UCDB where the bt will transition from one state to another TotalCoverage the weighted average of all the coverage types functional coverage and code coverage is recursive Deselect Code Coverage gt Enable Recursive Coverage Sums to view results for the local instance See Calculation of Total Coverage for coverage statistics details Transitions the number of states encountered in each level and all levels subsumed under that level for the UCDB UdpConditions the number of UCP conditions in each level and all levels under that level UdpExpressions the number of executable UDP expressions in each level and all levels s
308. the transition code e View Full Text Opens the View Transition dialog box which contains the full text of the condition View Declaration Opens the source file and bookmarks the file line containing the declaration of the state machine Zoom Full Displays the FSM completely within the window Set Context Executes the env command to change the context to that of the state machine Add to Adds information about the state machine to the specific window Properties Displays the FSM Properties dialog box containing detailed information about the FSM FSM View Menu This menu becomes available in the Main menu when the FSM View window 1s active Table 4 28 FSM View Menu FSM View Menu Ten Show State Counts Displays the coverage counts for each state in the state bubble Show Transition Counts Displays the coverage counts for each transition 140 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference FSM Viewer Window Table 4 28 FSM View Menu cont FSM View Menu Tem Show Transition Conditions Displays the condition for each transition The condition format is based on the GUI_expression_format Operators Enable Info Mode Popups Displays popup information when you hover over a state or transition Track Wave Cursor Displays current and previous state information based on the cursor location in the Wave window Transitions to Reset Controls the display of transitions to a reset state e Sh
309. tives Window Columns 0 eee eee ee eee 111 Table 4 18 Covergroups Window Columns 0 00 c cee cece ee eens 120 Table 4 19 Covergroup Window Popup Menu 0 eee eee 122 Table 4 20 Files Window Columns 0 0 0 00 ene eee 130 Table 4 21 Files Window Popup Menu 0 0 cece eee eae 131 Table 4 22 Piles Men 42 246444 45 24 a2 4 pecighehie Kb G nets dace eho eo edemeees cus 131 Table 4 23 FSM List Window Columns 0 0 ccc ccc eens 133 Table 4 24 FSM List Window Popup Menu 0 eee ee eee 133 Table 4 25 FSM List Menu 0 0 ence eee nee eees 133 Table 4 26 FSM Viewer Window Graphical Elements 0005 139 Table 4 27 FSM View Window Popup Menu 0 eee eee eee 140 Table 4 25 FSM View Menu 4 00i204eacee sn veaceddude seen dow es Seah eee eee ees 140 Table 4 29 Columns in the Instance Coverage Window 0 0 ce eee eee 143 Table 4 30 Instance Coverage Popup Menu 00 eee ee eee 147 Table 4 31 Library Window Columns 0 00 eee eens 148 Table 4 32 Library Window Popup Menu 0 0 149 Table 4 33 Actions for Time Markers 0 00 eens 153 Table 4 34 Triggering Options 0 0 ce ee eee eeeas 164 Table 4 35 List Window Popup Menu 0 ccc eee eens 168 Table 4 36 Locals Window Columns 0 0 eeee en eeeeas 171 Table 4 37 Locals
310. tructure Window You can sort code coverage information for any column by clicking the column heading Clicking the column heading again will reverse the order Coverage information in the Structure window is dynamically linked to the Code Coverage Analysis windows Click the left mouse button on any file in the Files window to display that file s un executed statements branches conditions expressions and toggles in the Code Coverage Analysis windows Lines from the selected file that are excluded from coverage statistics are also displayed in the Code Coverage Analysis windows For details on how the Total Coverage column statistics are calculated see Calculation of Total Coverage 252 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Transaction View Window The Transaction View window displays information about a selected Questa Verification IP transaction instance It is only available for viewing transactions for Questa Verification IPs For detailed information on this window please see Questa Verification IP Transaction Details in Transaction View Window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 253 Transcript Window The Transcript window maintains a running history of commands that are invoked and messages that occur as you work with ModelSim When a simulation is running the Transcript displays a VSIM prompt allowing you to enter command line commands from within the graphic interface You can scroll backward and f
311. types and object kinds that are displayed Includes a Change Filter selection that opens the Filter Objects dialog which allows you to filter the display Viewing Toggle Coverage in the Objects Window Toggle coverage data can be displayed in the Objects window in multiple columns as shown in Figure 4 50 Right click the column title bar and select Show All Columns to make sure all Toggle coverage columns are displayed There is a column for each transition type ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 193 Window Reference Objects Window Figure 4 50 Objects Window Toggle Coverage aC CS EC A EH into Reg Internal 119628 11962 9 0 0 0 0 2 11 AEZ gz EA outof Reg Intermal 0 i 0 0 E a agate ist Reg Internal 2 0 j 0 0 gz clk Fe m Internal Cede eet A out wire DEUE 0800 20804 0 i T 0 EE EHA dat EE 23401 28607 629308634544 119620 114418 a addr I ip et Internal 26007 0 j 0 j EHA loop DAMMIT Aeg Internal I I 0 j 0 0 F Ti A m a oo Oe bo 5 fc Po 7 Variable Internal j CH Net Intemal 15602 15601 0 0 0 Ow Et Net Internal 7a03 7803 0 0 0 0 aa GUI Elements of the Objects Window This section describes GUI elements specific to this Window Current Time Label Displays the Current Time or the Now end of simulation time This is the time used to control state values annotated in the window For details see Current Time Label Column Descriptions Table 4 49 T
312. u Compile Menu Table 2 4 Compile Menu Item Description Compile source files Compile Options Set various compile options SystemC Link Collect the object files created in the different design libraries and uses them to build a shared library so in the current work library Compile All Compile all files in the open project Disabled if you don t have a project open Compile Selected Compile the files selected in the project tab Disabled if you don t have a project open Compile Order Set the compile order of the files in the open project Disabled if you don t have a project open Compile Report report on the compilation history of the selected file s in the project Disabled if you don t have a project open Compile Summary report on the compilation history of all files in the project Disabled if you don t have a project open Simulate Menu Table 2 5 Simulate Menu Item Description Design Optimization Open the Design Optimization dialog to configure simulation optimizations Start Simulation Load the selected design unit Runtime Options Set various simulation runtime options ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 45 Menus Simulate Menu Table 2 5 Simulate Menu Item Description cont Run lt default gt run simulation for one default run length change the run length with Simulate gt Runtime Options or use the Run Length text box on the toolbar Run All run simulation until
313. u Process gt Design Changes the view of the Processes for Processes window to show the Design processes in the design View Process Menu Process gt Hierarchy Changes the view of the hierarchy Processes window to show process hierarchy Profile Toolbar The Profile toolbar provides access to tools related to the profiling windows Ranked Calltree Design Unit and Structural Figure 3 16 Profile Toolbar F Under 0 103 O E Table 3 16 Profile Toolbar Buttons Beton Reme storie Description Collapse Menu Tools gt Profile gt Toggle the reporting for Sections Collapse Sections collapsed processes and functions 64 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Toolbars Schematic Toolbar Table 3 16 Profile Toolbar Buttons cont Profile Display performance and Cutoff memory profile data equal to or greater than set percentage Refresh Profile Data Save Profile Menu Tools gt Profile gt Results Profile Report Schematic Toolbar The Schematic toolbar provides access to tools for manipulating highlights and signals in the Dataflow and Schematic windows Refresh profile performance and memory data after changing profile cutoff Save profile data to output file prompts for file name Figure 3 17 Schematic Toolbar Tee gt He Be EE KB m Table 3 17 Schematic Toolbar Buttons Trace Input Menu Tools gt Trace gt Move the next event cursor to Net to Event Tr
314. ubsumed under that level name of user who ran simulation which created the UCDB arguments passed to vsim command Toolbar The Browser allows access to the Column Layout Toolbar and the Help Toolbar Verification Browser Menu This menu becomes available in the Main menu when the Verification Management Browser View window is active Table 4 58 Verification Browser View Menu Browser View Menu Description Item Add File Adds UCDB ucdb and ranking results rank files to the browser Refer to the section Viewing Test Data in the GUI for more information 262 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Verification Management Browser Window Table 4 58 Verification Browser View Menu cont Browser View Menu Description Item Remove File Removes an entry from this window From Browser Only as well as from the file system Browser and File System Remove Non Operates only on ranked rank files menu selection is grayed out Contributing Test s unless a ranked file is selected Removes any tests that do not contribute toward the coverage Testplan Import Displays the XML Testplan Import Dialog Box which allows you to import an XML test plan file into a UCDB which can then be merged with test results Merge Displays the Merge Files Dialog Box which allows you to merge any selected UCDB files Refer to the section Merging Coverage Data for more information Rank Displays the Rank Fil
315. umn will report both the active at end of simulation note along witha strong error message ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 87 Window Reference Assertions Window Table 4 2 Assertions Window Columns cont Failure Count Total number of times the assertion has failed in the current simulation Failure Limit The number of times the simulator will respond to a failure event on an assertion Failure Log enabled failure messages will be logged to the transcript disabled failure messages will not be logged to the transcript Formal Indicates formal analysis has been performed Data appears in this column only during post process analysis Coverage View mode Displayed values include blank no formal analysis has been performed assumption indicates that property was used as an assumption in the formal analysis conflict indicates conflict when inconsistent data merged in formal analysis failure indicates formal analysis has determined that property can fail inconclusive indicates formal analysis has not proved or falsified the property See Proof Radius column for amount of formal analysis performed proof indicates formal analysis has proven that property cannot fail for all legal stimulus vacuous indicates formal analysis has proven that the antecedent of the property cannot be reached property needs to be examined closer FPSA Actions Displays a matrix of information relati
316. umnLayout from the drop down list in the Column Layout Toolbar An asterisk prefix and blue font indicate column layouts are in their default state and which have been added or modified Click the Edit button to open the Edit Column Layout dialog where you can add and remove columns from the display and change their order Figure 6 2 296 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c GUI Customization User Defined Buttons and Menus Figure 6 2 Edit Column Layout Dialog Edit Column Layout a x Layout Mame AllColumns Columns Selections Available Columns Visible Columns aun MeniIn aun MenIr OK Cancel Or click the Create button to create a customized column layout for your application The Create Column Layout window allows you to select the columns that you want to appear in the customized layout For example in Figure 6 3 we have created a Memory Usage layout for the Ranked Profile window that includes only those columns related to memory usage Figure 6 3 Create Column Layout Dialog Create Column Layout Layout Mame Memory Us aqe Columns Selections _Add gt Memlnder i4 Delete Sum MenIni Sum Memin OK Cancel User Defined Buttons and Menus You can create Tcl processes procs that add user defined buttons and menus to the main window of ModelSim The Tcl procs are loaded after initialization by assigning them to the ModelSim SE G
317. urrently active window followed by a drop down list of bookmarks for each window You can set the maximum number of bookmarks listed in the Bookmark Options Dialog Box ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 21 Overview General GUI Tasks Managing Your Bookmarks 22 You can open the Manage Bookmarks dialog box with the Manage Bookmarks toolbar button or by selecting Bookmarks gt Manage Bookmarks The dialog box can be kept open during your simulation Figure 1 5 Figure 1 5 Manage Bookmarks Dialog Box Manage Bookmarks xi Simple view mode Source 1 30 0 questasim_main examples tutorials verilog datafl 2 Structure fo sim top p INITIAL 69 g Process foo2 ALWAYS 155 top c a Objects 002 addr sim top p pel Wave 1870 ns gt 2870 ns JE Structure sim top p i1 0R 46 Source 94 C questasim_main examples tutorials verilog datafi a Objects data_r sim top p a Objects data_r 8 sim top p a Delete Select bookmark to view details gt Simple view mode changes the buttons from name and icon mode to icon only mode e Checking Active window only changes the display to show the bookmarks in the currently active window Selecting a different window in the tool changes the display to the bookmarks set in that window Selecting New opens the New Bookmark dialog box The fields in the dialog automatically load the settings of the view in the currently active window You can ch
318. ute before being disabled by the simulator Default is Unlimited Log indicates whether data for the directive is currently being added to the functional coverage database tracks the current memory used by the cover directive Name lists directive names and design units Also any signals referenced in a directive are included in the hierarchy Refer to the section Using Assert Directive Names for more information Peak Memory tracks the peak memory used by the cover directive Peak Memory Time indicates the simulation run time at which the peak memory usage occurred Type shows the cover directive type Immediate or Concurrent Not displayed by default Weight shows the weighting factor that has been applied to the directive Cover Directives Window Tasks This section describes tasks for using the Cover Directives window Changing the Cover Directives Window Display Options You can set the window to display cover directives in a Recursive Mode or in a Show All Contexts mode 112 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Cover Directives Window The Recursive Mode displays all cover directives at and below the selected hierarchy instance the selection being taken from a Structure window that is the sim tab Otherwise only items actually in that particular scope are shown The Show All Contexts selection displays all instances in the design It does not following the current co
319. vailable to open it For example when you select an expression in the Code Coverage Analysis Expression Analysis window and you click in the column of a line containing an expression the associated truth tables appear in the Coverage Details window Each line in the truth table is one of the possible combinations for the expression The expression is considered to be covered gets a green check mark if the entire truth table is covered When you hover over statements conditions or branches in the Source window the Hits and BC columns display the coverage numbers for that line of code For example in Figure 4 68 the blue highlighted line shows that the expression b b b1 was hit time The value in the Hits column shows the total coverage for all items in the truth table as shown in the Coverage Details window when you click the specific line in the hits column In the BC count column only the true counts are given with the exception of the AllFalse branch if any The AllFalse count is given next to the first if condition in an if else tree that does not contain a terminating catch all else branch You can determine the branch false count by subtracting counts in the BC column from the Hits column ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 221 Window Reference Source Window Source Window Code Coverage Indicator Icons Table 4 53 Source Window Code Coverage Indicators Icon Description Indication All statements
320. ve ne Msgs E ftest_smiinta GOOOOORROOT yy tooo Fe ftest smidutidats a EE SG a a aS fhest_smidutyclk 1 wr fhesk_srifdubtfreset JO E ftest_smjoutof O00 me ftest_smidata LD A ee me ftest_smaddr doddinn Wooo tone yo ipod tooo tooo Woon 000 Wooo gt hest_smiclk 1 ww fhesk smfreset J gt itest _smird_n Ww Ihest_srofvwr_ni we fhest_smyidone False gt itest _sm enb_outoF true gt ftest_sm dutjinta oococococoo PSS PSS SS SESSSFESSS IEEE EMS ee test_smfdutfoutof poo h tooo ooo tooo Nooo essen S Tsim test su dut into A 715 ns RR ftest_smfdutjrd_n 1 opogooonoooooooooooooooooooooogo Ww fhesk_smifdutfiwron i Be ftest_smidutfin reg an SSS Sa ooo kal ne Mow 10000 ns K UE IT RT CT DT l l For information about using this window with a Power Aware simulation refer to the section in the Power Aware Simulation User s Manual You can add objects to the Wave window from other windows in the following ways e Mouse Drag and drop e Mouse Click the middle mouse button when the cursor is over an object or group of objects in the Objects or Locals windows The specified object s are added to the Wave Window e Toolbar Click and hold the to specify where selected signals are placed above the in the Pathnames Pane ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 2 1 Window Reference Wave Window appended after the Insertion Pointer in the Pathnames Pane at
321. ve instances of the selected class are displayed in the Class Instances window Class instances that have not yet come into existence or have been destroyed are not displayed Once you have chosen the class type you want to observe you can fix that instance in the window while you debug by selecting File gt Environment gt Fix to Current Context Class Naming Format Class instance names are formatted as follows lt class_type gt lt nnn gt where lt class_type gt is the name of the class type and lt n gt is the reference identifier for a particular instance of the class type For example uvm_queue_3 14 is the 14th instance of the class uvm_queue_3 GUI Elements of the Class Instances Window This section describes the GUI elements specific to the Class Instances window Popup Menu Items Table 4 11 Class Instances Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tem View Declaration Highlights the line of code where the type of the instance 1s declared opening the source file if necessary Add Wave Adds the selected class instance to the Wave window Add to Allows you to log the selected class instance or add it to the Wave or List windows ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 103 Class Tree Window The Class Tree window provides a hierarchical view of your SystemVerilog classes including any extensions of other classes related methods and properties as well as any covergroups Figure 4 7 Class Tree Window Class
322. viewing on or off Only enabled if the simulator is invoked with the assertdebug option or the ini file variable AssertionDebug is set to 1 Cumulative Threads The cumulative thread count for the assertion This count is designed to highlight those directives that are starting too many attempts For example given the assertion assert property posedge clk a l gt b If a is true throughout the simulation then the above assertion will start a brand new attempt at every clock An attempt once started will only be alive until the next clock So this assertion will not appear abnormally high in the Memory and Peak Memory columns but it will have a high count in the Cumulative Threads column Identifies the design unit to which the assertion is bound Design Unit Type Identifies the HDL type of the design unit Disable Count The number of assertion attempts that have been disabled due to either an abort expression becoming true PSL or a disable if expression becoming true SVA This column is populated when you specify assertcover or assertdebug for vsim or if either the AssertionCover or AssertionDebug ini file variable is set to 1 Identifies whether failure checking is active for the assertion EOS Note Identifies when assertion directives are active at the end of simulation EOS on or off Refer to the assertion active command If the assert directive is strong the EOS Note col
323. w signal o Order of Indexes Specify the order of the new signal as ascending or descending o Remove selected signals after combining Specify whether the grouped signals should remain in the List window This process creates virtual signals For more information refer to the section Virtual Signals Setting Time Markers in the List Window Time markers in the List window are similar to cursors in the Wave window Time markers tag lines in the data table so you can quickly jump back to that time Markers are indicated by a thin box surrounding the marked line Figure 4 26 Time Markers in the List Window iol xi File Edit View Add Tools Window O g Signal Properties gt gay E n Fi mM Goo O O O delt a sim test sm our 11000 2 boooooooooOoOoOOoOoOoOoOoOoOooOOOL 495000 O MUMUeTeTelepepetetet erate terete teeta ete e lee j booooooooOoOoOoOoOoOOoOoOoOoOoOoOOOL c000OO O f mimfninininininininininin nnna O booooooooooOoOooOOoOoOoOoOoOOOoOOL S1O000 0 RIMteteteelelet etal erate rete ce ee ete eee j dddddddddd0d0d000d00d000000 lL 11000 1 Pimimiminininin nininini nininini O boOoOoooooOoOoOOOOoOoOoOOOOOOOOOL HOOOOOOOOOOoOOOOOOoOOOOOOD j 0 SZ0000 O MINTED Tetel el et et erate terete tee ee ene eee S23000 1 heieletaeleletetatelelereteteleleceieiel eles SSO000 0 f Mimfmiminininin nininini ninina S31L000 1 mimfniminininin ninina oo0oooooooooooc
324. was run run the line number in Organized tree structure of the sorted messages as well as when expanded the text of the messages Message ID Message ID ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 185 Window Reference Message Viewer Window Table 4 46 Message Viewer Window Columns cont Message severity such as Warning Note or Error Test Args Application command used to generate the coverage data if the data was not generated by vsim similar to how Vsim Args operates for vsim commands 186 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Message Viewer Window Popup Menu Right click anywhere in the window to open a popup menu that contains the following selections Table 4 47 Message Viewer Window Popup Menu Popup Menu Tiem Reload Viewer Data Opens a Source window for the file and in some cases takes you to the associated line number View Opens selected item e Verbose Message Verbose Message dialog box with details about message e Message Source Source code at line number where message is Log File Log file in a Source window Object Declarations Object window to view declarations Assertion Info Assertion window to view assertions ATV ATV to view assertion threads Change Environment Change environment Waveform Waveform window opens Go to Time in Wave at time of selected message e Add Objs to Wave adds objects associated with selected message Analysis Questions Opens Analysis Qu
325. whether in the course of receiving support or consulting services evaluating Products performing beta testing or otherwise any inventions product improvements modifications or developments made by Mentor Graphics at Mentor Graphics sole discretion will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics ESC SOFTWARE If Customer purchases a license to use development or prototyping tools of Mentor Graphics Embedded Software Channel ESC Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a nontransferable nonexclusive license to reproduce and distribute executable files created using ESC compilers including the ESC run time libraries distributed with ESC C and C compiler Software that are linked into a composite program as an integral part of Customer s compiled computer program provided that Customer distributes these files only in conjunction with Customer s compiled computer program Mentor Graphics does NOT grant Customer any right to duplicate incorporate or embed copies of Mentor Graphics real time operating systems or other embedded software products into Customer s products or applications without first signing or otherwise agreeing to a separate agreement with Mentor Graphics for such purpose BETA CODE 4 1 Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation which may be either alpha or beta collectively Beta Code which may not be used without Mentor Graphics explicit authorizatio
326. window and all Notepad windows enter the notepad command within ModelSim to open the Notepad editor Table 5 1 Mouse Shortcuts Click and drag the left mouse button select an area Shift click the left mouse button extend selection Double click the left mouse button select a word Double click and drag the left mouse button select a group of words Ctrl click the left mouse button move insertion cursor without changing the selection Click the left mouse button on a previous copy and paste previous command string to ModelSim or VSIM prompt current prompt Click the middle mouse button paste selection to the clipboard Click and drag the middle mouse button scroll the window ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 285 Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Actions Main and Source Window Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts Table 5 2 Keyboard Shortcuts Left Arrow move cursor left or right one character Right Arrow Ctrl Left Arrow move cursor left or right one word Ctrl Right Arrow Shift Any Arrow extend text selection Ctrl Shift Left Arrow extend text selection by one word Ctrl Shift Right Arrow Up Arrow Transcript window scroll through command history Down Arrow Source window move cursor one line up or down Ctrl Up Arrow Transcript window moves cursor to first or last line Ctrl Down Arrow Source window moves cursor up or down one paragraph Alt Open a pop up command prompt for entering commands Ctrl
327. ws you to do an incremental search for specific code To activate the Find bar Figure 4 80 in the Source window select Edit gt Find from the Main menus or click the Find icon in the Main toolbar For more information see Find and Filter Functions 236 ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 80 Source Window with Find Toolbar Tutorialfexamples tutorials verilog dataflow orac At 40 39 40 41 43 44 45 46 a ro end endtask Hi output word size 1 0 d begin if werbose display 4t E addr r a rue r I Sstrh r 0 df posedge clk U posedge clk ad data Sstrh r i while rady HET xJFind Hf end P O YU E 4a a TE hh proc Customizing the Source Window You can customize a variety of settings for Source windows For example you can change fonts spacing colors syntax highlighting and so forth To customize Source window settings select Tools gt Edit Preferences This opens the Preferences dialog Select Source Windows from the Window List ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 237 Window Reference Source Window Figure 4 81 Preferences Dialog for Customizing Source Window Preferences kssertions Window Dataflow Vindows eral Text Settings i BT ERR Editor Foks k cals Window Files Main Wind Document text fe H fio B 7 aa saci Code Browser See
328. xecuted in each level and all levels under that level Stmts missed the number of executable statements that were not executed in each level and all levels under that level Stmt the current ratio of Stmt hits to Stmt count Stmt graph a bar chart displaying the Stmt if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Toggle nodes the number of points in each instance where the logic will transition from one state to another Toggles hit Toggles hit the number of nodes in each instance that have transitioned at least once _ number of nodes in each instance that have transitioned at least the number of nodes in each instance that have transitioned at least once _ Toggles missed the number of nodes in each instance that have not transitioned at least once Toggle the current ratio of Toggle hits to Toggle nodes Toggle graph a bar chart displaying the Toggle if the percentage is below 90 the bar is red 90 or more the bar is green you can change this threshold percentage by editing the PrefCoverage cutoff preference variable Top Category displays the category that is expanded in the initial invocation of the Structure window categories are DU Instance TB component Package Vcdstim and Statistics Total Coverage The weighted average of all the coverage types functional coverage and code c
329. y driver s of the selected signal net or register Display driver s and reader s of the selected signal net or register Display reader s of the selected signal net or register Show Wave Menu Dataflow gt Display the embedded wave TA Show Wave viewer pane FSM Toolbar The FSM toolbar provides access to tools that control the information displayed in the FSM Viewer window Figure 3 8 FSM Toolbar 23 23 23 wal i Pe Table 3 8 FSM Toolbar Buttons Show State Menu FSM View gt Show only available when State Counts simulating with coverage Displays the coverage count over each state Counts ModelSim SE GUI Reference Manual v10 2c 59 Toolbars Help Toolbar Table 3 8 FSM Toolbar Buttons cont Show Menu FSM View gt Show only available when Transition Transition Counts simulating with coverage Counts Displays the coverage count for each transition Show Menu FSM View gt Show Displays the conditions of each Transition Transition Conditions transition Conditions Track Wave Menu FSM View gt Track The FSM Viewer tracks your Cursor Wave Cursor current cursor location Enable Info Menu FSM View gt Enable Displays information when Mode Popups Info Mode Popups you mouse over each state or transition Previous Steps to the previous state in State the FSM Viewer window Next State None Steps to the next state in the FSM Viewer window Help Too

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

N055174 man sander D26453 Euro.indd  SA-PM11  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file